You are on page 1of 536

Cabling using Creo Parametric 2.

0
Overview
In this course, you will learn how to create 3-D electrical harnesses using Creo Parametric 2.0. This
includes using Creo Schematics to pass schematic diagram information into the 3-D harness designs
created within Creo Parametric 2.0. You will learn how to route electrical harnesses both with and
without schematic diagram information, create flattened harnesses for manufacturing, and document
harness designs by creating flattened harness drawings that include customized BOM tables and wire
list information.

A significant portion of the course is devoted to a cabling design project, during which you will create
a full wiring harness with minimal “picks and clicks” to solidify techniques learned previously in the
course.

After successfully completing the course, you will be able to create 3-D electrical harnesses and
associated manufacturing deliverables using Creo Parametric 2.0. Optionally, you may wish to attend
the Introduction to Creo Schematics course. This will enable a full understanding of the schematic
design process used to provide schematic data for the creation of electrical harness assemblies in
Creo Parametric 2.0.

At the end of each module, you will complete a set of review questions to reinforce critical topics from
that module. At the end of the course, you will complete a course assessment in Pro/FICIENCY
intended to evaluate your understanding of the course as a whole.

Course Objectives
 Learn the basic Creo Parametric cabling process

 Create harness assembly structures

 Set up for cabling

 Route wires and cables

 Modify wire routings

 Route and utilize networks

 Establish logical references

 Create harness components and cosmetics

 Create flat harness

 Document harness designs

 Comprehensive design project


Introduction to the Creo Basic Cabling Process
Module Overview:
In this module, you learn about the basic cabling process that is typically used to prepare for, route,
flatten, and document a Creo Parametric wiring harness assembly. This simplified process is
fundamentally used at most companies, although your specific company process may differ. The
simplified process provides examples for both manual cable routing as well as routing information that
originates from an outside schematic source, such as Creo Schematics. The cabling process is
supported throughout the course modules and again in two different projects.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Set up and prepare for cabling by creating the assembly, connectors, and the harness part.

 Route the cables using both manual and schematic routing.

 Flatten the cable harness and fan out the wire segments.

 Create a drawing of the cable harness.


Concept: Step 1: Assembly and Cabling Setup
Assembly and Cabling Setup
The first step in the basic cabling process is assembly and cabling setup. In this step, you perform the
following tasks:

 Create the cabling assembly – It is recommended that you create a sub-assembly that contains
all cabling features and components. The cabling assembly contains the connector models, the
harness part, and the wire/cable spool features.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Connector Entry Ports


 Transfer the routing and connector references – You can refer to a schematic, if available, to
help determine which references are appropriate based on the wire From and To locations.

o First, consider all of the geometry that you need to reference to route the wires, such as
main surfaces of the model, obstacles (such as screw bosses or ribs), and other geometry
that assists in routing (such as an axis of a hole to route through).

o Next, consider the geometry or coordinate system references that are used to assemble the
connectors.

o Finally, transfer the above geometry and references to the Cabling assembly using various
data sharing features.

 Assemble the connectors – Create connectors with coordinate systems that can be designated
as Entry Ports. An Entry Port is simply a coordinate system that is defined with the Z-axis facing
out of the model, and is used as the connection location for wires and cables. Connectors can
also be created with coordinate systems to aid in rapid assembly through the use of component
interfaces. Once created, you assemble the connectors into the cabling assembly at their proper
locations. Note that you typically assemble the connectors to the shared geometry within the
cabling assembly, and do not assemble the connectors in the upper-level assembly.
Figure 2 – Viewing the Assembled Connectors
 Create the harness model – The harness part contains the wire and cable features.

 Load the cabling appearance file – The appearance file contains the colors that are used to
differentiate the wires and cables in the model. The appearance file should contain color names
that match those colors specified in each spool file.
Concept: Step 2: Routing Wires and Cables
Routing Wires and Cables
The second step in the basic cabling process is routing wires and cables.

Figure 1 – Routing a Wire Between Entry Ports


You can route the wires and cables either manually or by utilizing schematic data.
Manually Routing Wires and Cables
When manually routing wires and cables, you must first designate connectors. Designation enables
the system to recognize connector names, where the connectors are located, and where and how
many entry ports are on each connector. Entry ports are coordinate systems created in each
connector, which were assembled in the previous process step.

After the connectors have been designated, you can define the spools to be used in your cabling
assemblies. Spools specify the types of wire and cable available to you for routing, and include
thickness, gauge, and color. You can create new spools or read in existing spool files.

Once the spools have been defined, you can create and route wires and/or cables. As you create new
wires/cables, you define their connector From and To entry ports on connectors in the assembly. For
each created wire, you specify a spool that is used to determine its physical diameter and color in the
model.
Figure 2 – Completed Wires
Once the wire is created based on its selected From and To locations, you can edit its routing path or
insert locations as desired.

Using a Schematic to Route Wires and Cables


You can use Creo Schematics software to create a wiring schematic for your cabling assembly. The
schematic data (which includes connector, wire, and spool information) can be exported out of Creo
Schematics as an XML file and then imported into Creo Parametric.

Once the schematic data is available in Creo Parametric, you can auto-designate the connectors in
the assembly.

Figure 3 – Schematic Diagram


The schematic data is also used to automatically create spools as the wires and cable features are
created. In addition, the schematic data also predetermines the From and To entry ports for each
created wire/cable.

Once the wire is created based on its predetermined From and To locations, you can edit its routing
path or insert locations as desired.
Concept: Step 3: Flattening the Harness
Flattening the Harness
The third step in the basic cabling process is flattening the harness. In this step, you perform the
following tasks:

 Create the manufacturing harness – The manufacturing harness assembly contains the flat
harness assembly. The manufacturing harness also includes a sub-window containing the
harness model from the cabling assembly.

Figure 1 – Harness Prior to Flattening


 Flatten the harness – Lay out the harness in a 2-D plane, dragging the wire and cable segments
in the flat state so that they are easily viewable. You can fan (flatten) the wires and cables either
manually or automatically. You can also specify the wire segment angles at the connector ends.
Features are created in the flat harness assembly as wires are flattened.

Figure 2 – Flattening and Fanning Out the Harness


 Assemble the connector components – Assemble the connector components into the flat
harness assembly. You can adjust the angles of the connectors as necessary. Once the
connectors are assembled, you can fan out the wire and cable segments attached to the
connectors.
Figure 3 – Flattened Harness and Assembled Connectors
Concept: Step 4: Creating the Harness Drawing
Creating the Harness Drawing
The fourth step in the basic cabling process is creating the harness drawing.

Figure 1 – Harness Drawing


For example, you can add drawing views of the following models:

 Cabling assembly – Enables you to display a 3-D view orientation of the completed harness
assembly. In Figure 1, the lower view depicts the cabling assembly.

 Flattened harness – Enables you to display a 2-D view of the completed harness. This enables
you to view the harness in a more simplified format. The upper view in the figure depicts the
flattened harness.

You can show notes in the drawing to specify the reference designator labels or wire names.
Dimensions can also be shown to illustrate wire lengths, angles, and radii.

You can also add tables to display a wide variety of additional information, including:

 Bill of Materials.

 Wire From and To locations.

 Individual wire lengths or total length of wire required.

 The spool used for a given wire or cable.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Process\Cabling folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CHARGER.ASM.
Objectives
Set up and prepare for cabling by creating the assembly, the connectors, and the harness part.

Route the cables using both manual and schematic routing.

Flatten the cable harness.

Create a drawing of the cable harness.

You are tasked with creating the wire harness for a charging station used to charge the batteries of
two-way radios. You must first create the cabling assembly and connectors. You can then route the
wires within the charging housing. Next, you flatten the harness so that it can be documented in a
drawing. Finally, you create the drawing and insert a table that documents the different wire runs,
spools, colors, and lengths.

1. Step 1. Set up the assembly to route cables.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click COVER.PRT and select Hide.

Figure 1
3. Create a new cabling assembly by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group.


 Select Subassembly as the Type and Standard as the Sub-type.
 Type CABLING as the Name and click OK.
 In the Creation Options dialog box, click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.
Figure 2
4. Place the new cabling assembly by doing the following:

 Verify that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared and click OK.
 Right-click in the graphics window and select Default Constraint.
 Click Complete Component .
 Click Settings from the model tree and select Tree Filters.
 In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box in the Display category and
click OK.

Figure 3
5. Enable Csys Display .

Figure 4
6. In the model tree, right-click CABLING.ASM and select Activate.
7. Insert a shrinkwrap feature by doing the following:
 In the ribbon, click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.
 In the dashboard, select Autocollect all solid surfaces from the drop-down list.
 Click Yes in the Exclude Internal Components message window.
 In the graphics window, right-click and select References.
 Expand BASE.PRT and MODULE.PRT in the model tree.

 Press CTRL and select coordinate systems C1, C2, L1, L2, and M1 from the model tree.

 In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, click Complete Feature .

Figure 5
8. In the model tree, right-click CABLING.ASM and select Open.
 In the model tree, right-click the ASM_DEF_CSYS coordinate system and select Hide.

Figure 6
9. Open CONN-C_2PIN.PRT by doing the following:

 Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.


 Double-click CONN-C_2PIN.PRT.

 Notice that the model has multiple ENTRY coordinate systems.

 Notice the Z-axis orientation, which faces out of the model.

Figure 7
10. Select the CONN coordinate system from the model tree.
11. Notice the coordinate system location and orientation. This coordinate system will be used for rapid
assembly.

Figure 8
12. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
13. Open CONN-M_9PIN.PRT by doing the following:

 Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.


 Double-click CONN-M_9PIN.PRT.

 Notice that the model has a single ENTRY coordinate system.

 Notice the Z-axis orientation, which faces out of the model.

Figure 9
14. Select the ASM coordinate system from the model tree.

15. Notice the coordinate system location and orientation. This coordinate system will be used for rapid
assembly.
Figure 10
16. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
17. Assemble CONN-C_2PIN.PRT by doing the following:

 Click Assemble from the Component group and double-click CONN-C_2PIN.PRT.


 Select the C1 coordinate system.

 Right-click and select New Location.


 Select the C2 coordinate system.

 In the Component Placement dashboard, click Complete Component .

Figure 11
18. Assemble CONN-L_2PIN.PRT by doing the following:

 Click Assemble and double-click CONN-L_2PIN.PRT.


 Select the L1 coordinate system.

 Right-click and select New Location.


 Select the L2 coordinate system.

 Click Complete Component .


Figure 12
19. Assemble CONN-M_9PIN.PRT by doing the following:

 Click Assemble and double-click CONN-M_9PIN.PRT.


 Select the M1 coordinate system.

 Click Complete Component .

Figure 13
20. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab and select Cabling from the Engineering group.
21. Create a new harness by doing the following:

 Click Create Harness from the Harness group.


 Type HARNESS as the Name and click OK.
 Click Browse in the New File Options dialog box.
 Double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.

 Click OK in the New File Options dialog box and OK in the Warning message window.
Figure 14
22. In the ribbon, select the View tab.
23. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
24. In the Appearances Manager, click File > Open and double-click WIRE_COLORS.DMT.
25. Click Override all in the Warning message window.
26. Cursor over the colors in the My Appearances section, and notice that the names are each three
letters.

 Click Close.

Figure 15
1. Step 2. Route the cables in the assembly.
o There are two different methods you can use to route cables. The first method is called manual
routing, and the second method is called schematic routing. In this process exercise, you will use
both methods, starting first with manual routing.

2. Designate the M1 connector by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, select the Cabling tab.


 Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
 Select the M1 connector.

 Click Accept to accept the default parameters.


 Click Entry Ports from the menu manager.
 Select the ENTRY coordinate system and click OK.
 Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
 Click Flat > Done > Done from the menu manager.

Figure 16
3. Designate the left C1 connector by doing the following:

 Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
 Spin the model slightly and zoom in on the left C1 connector.

 Select the left C1 connector.

 Click Accept to accept the default parameters.


 Click Entry Ports from the menu manager.
 Press CTRL and select the ENTRY_1 and ENTRY_2 coordinate systems, then click OK.
 Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
 Click Round > Done > Done from the menu manager.

Figure 17
4. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Named Views and select Standard Orientation.
5. Designate the left L1 connector by doing the following:

 Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
 Spin the model slightly and zoom in on the left L1 connector.

 Select the left L1 connector.

 Click Accept to accept the default parameters.


 Click Entry Ports from the menu manager.
 Press CTRL and select the ENTRY_1 and ENTRY_2 coordinate systems, then click OK.
 Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
 Click Round > Done > Done from the menu manager.

Figure 18
6. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
7. In the ribbon, click Cabling Parameters from the Components group.
8. Press CTRL and select the designated C1, L1, and M1 connectors.

 Click OK.

Figure 19
9. Define the reference descriptions for each of the connectors by doing the following:

 In the REF_DES column of the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the descriptions of the C1,
L1, and M1 connectors to C-01, L-01, and M-01, respectively.
 Click Apply and then click OK.
Figure 20

10. Disable Csys Display .


11. Click Ref Designator Labels from the In Graphics toolbar.

Figure 21
12. Read in new spools of wire by doing the following:

 Click Spools from the Logical Data group.


 Click Read from the menu manager.
 In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory .
 Press CTRL and select 14_BLK_SXL.SPL, 14_RED_SXL.SPL, 16_BLU_SXL.SPL, and
16_GRY_SXL.SPL.

 Click Open.
Figure 22
13. Click Edit from the menu manager.
14. Select 14_RED_SXL and click OK.
 View the values in the columns.

 Notice that the COLOR value matches a color name in the appearance file.

 Click Cancel.

Figure 23
15. Click Done/Return.
16. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

17. Enable Csys Display .


18. Select the PRT_CSYS_DEF harness coordinate system, right-click, and select Hide.
Figure 24
19. Create four new wires and assign spools by doing the following:

 Click Route Cables from the Route group.


 In the Route cables dialog box, click New Wire four times.
 Set the spool for wire W-1 to 14_RED_SXL.

 Set the spool for wire W-2 to 14_BLK_SXL.

 Set the spool for wire W-3 to 16_BLU_SXL.

 Set the spool for wire W-4 to 16_GRY_SXL.

Figure 25
20. Specify the W-1 wire routing references by doing the following:

 Select W-1 and then click in the From reference collector to activate it.
 Select the ENTRY coordinate system on connector M-01.

 Select the ENTRY_1 coordinate system on connector C-01 as the To reference.

Figure 26
21. Specify the W-2 wire routing references by doing the following:

 Select W-2 and then click in the From reference collector to activate it.
 Select the ENTRY coordinate system on connector M-01.

 Select the ENTRY_2 coordinate system on connector C-01 as the To reference.

Figure 27
22. Specify the W-3 and W-4 wire routing references by doing the following:

 Select W-3, press CTRL, and select W-4.


 Right-click the model and select From.
 Select the ENTRY coordinate system on connector M-01.

 Select the ENTRY_1 coordinate system on connector L-01 as the To reference.

Figure 28
23. Complete the routing by doing the following:

 In the Route cables dialog box, ensure that the Route Type is specified as Simple Route.
 Click OK.
24. Disable Csys Display .
Figure 29
25. Click Thick Cables from the In Graphics toolbar.
26. Spin the model slightly to view the wires.

27. Notice that W-1 and W-2 (red and black wires) are interfering with the rib.

Figure 30
28. Notice also that W-3 and W-4 (blue and gray wires) have the same destination, which is not
desired.

Figure 31

29. Enable Csys Display .


30. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

31. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
32. Edit the W-4 wire routing by doing the following:
 Press CTRL and select wires W-3 (blue) and W-4 (gray) from the model.
 With only W-4 selected in the dialog box, select the ENTRY_2 coordinate system on connector
L-01 as the To reference.

 Click OK.
33. Disable Csys Display .

Figure 32

34. Click Center Line from the In Graphics toolbar.


35. Edit the routing of the red wire by doing the following:

 Select W-1 (red wire) in the graphics window.


 Right-click and select Insert Locations.
 Starting from just below the M-01 connector, select the locations as shown:

 Two locations are on the flat.

 Three locations are on the thick rib: one on the right round, one on the flat surface, and one
on the left round.

 Five more locations wind around the ribs, staying on the flat surface.

 In the Location dashboard, click Complete Feature .

Figure 33
36. Edit the routing of the black wire by doing the following:

 Select W-2 (black wire) in the graphics window.


 Right-click and select Reroute.
 Select the first and last inserted locations for W-1 (red wire).

 In the Reroute cables dashboard, click Complete Feature .

Figure 34
37. Click Thick Cables .
38. Spin the model slightly to view the wires.

39. Notice that W-1 and W-2 (red and black wires) are no longer interfering with the rib.

40. Notice also that W-3 and W-4 (blue and gray wires) now have the correct destinations.

Figure 35
 You will now use Schematic Routing to route the wiring for the other half of the charger.

41. Review the completed Creo schematics wiring diagram. The schematic was already created in Creo
Schematics.

42. The schematic information has already been exported to an XML file from Creo Schematics.
Figure 36

43. If necessary, enable Thick Cables and disable Csys Display .


44. Import the XML schematic information by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, click Import from the Logical Data group.


 In the menu manager, click RS Designer > Whole XML.
 Double-click CHARGER.XML in the File Open dialog box.

 Notice the status bar states that the XML file has been read successfully.

45. Automatically designate the connectors by doing the following:

 Click Auto Designate from the Logical Data group.


 Observe the Auto Match status for the two new connectors. These were located based on their
component names.

 Click Apply, then click Close.


46. Zoom out if necessary to view the additional reference designator labels.

Figure 37

47. Click Update from the Logical Data group.


48. Click Select All > Done Sel from the menu manager.
49. Click Compare from the Logical Data group.
50. Select the Alphabetical check box from the menu manager.
 Click Execute.
51. Notice the “missing” and YES results.
52. Also notice the Assembly Cabling column versus the XML Reference Data column.

Figure 38
53. Click Close.
54. Create the W-5 and W-6 wires by doing the following:

 Click Route Cables .


 Notice that there are four defined spools in the model tree.

 Click Find in the Route cables dialog box.


 In the Find Cables dialog box, click wire W-5 and drag to also select wire W-6.
 Click Add , then click OK.
 Notice that there are now six spools in the model tree. These spools were created automatically
from the schematic data.

 Notice that the From and To reference collectors are already defined.

 Click Apply.

Figure 39
55. Create the W-7 wire by doing the following:
 Click Find .
 In the Find Cables dialog box, select W-7.
 Click Add , then click OK.
 Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 40
56. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

57. Edit the W-7 (brown wire) routing by doing the following:

 Select W-7 (brown wire).


 Right-click and select Insert Locations.
 Starting from just below the M-01 connector, select the locations as shown:

 Two locations are on the flat surface.

 Three locations are on the thick rib: one on the left round, one on the flat surface, and one
on the right round.

 Five more locations wind around the ribs, staying on the flat surface.

 Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.

Figure 41
58. Create the W-8 wire by doing the following:

 Click Route Cables .


 Click Find .
 Select W-8, click Add , and click OK.
 Edit the Route Type to Follow Cable.
 Select W-7 (brown wire).
 Click Center Line .
 Select the first and last inserted locations from W-7 (brown wire).

 Click OK.

Figure 42
 Notice the use of schematic data for automated spool creation, designating components, and
presetting wire From and To references.

59. In the Logical Data group, click Update .


60. In the Logical Data group, click Compare .
61. Click Execute.
62. Notice that all wires have now been matched.

Figure 43
63. Click Close.
64. Click Quit from the menu manager.
65. Enable Thick Cables .
Figure 44
66. Observe that the routing is now complete.

1. Step 3. Flatten the cable harness.


1. Enable Center Line .
2. Disable Ref Designator Labels to disable their display.

Figure 45
3. To avoid twisting in long, flattened segments, edit the cable locations to aid flattening by doing the
following:

 Press CTRL and query-select all 20 Cable Location pairs, as shown.

 On the Cabling tab, click Properties from the Locations group.


 Edit the Grouping to Flat.
 Edit the Angle to 180 and click OK.

Figure 46
 You do not see a visual change in the graphics window.

4. For visibility of white wires, modify the background to Dark Background.

 Click File > Options, then select System Colors.


 In the Color Scheme drop-down menu, select Dark Background and then click OK.
5. Create a new manufacturing harness by doing the following:

 Click New and select Manufacturing as the Type.


 Select Harness as the Sub-type.
 Type HARN_MFG as the Name and click OK.
 In the Open dialog box, click In Session and double-click HARNESS.PRT.
 Select Master Rep and click OK.
 Edit the Assembly Name to HARN_FLAT and click OK.
Figure 47
6. Drag the left window edge for HARN_MFG.ASM and the other assemblies to the right slightly to
create a margin so the desktop is visible.

 This ensures that the sub-window containing HARNESS.PRT is visible.

7. Click Flatten > Lay Out from the menu manager.


8. In the sub-window, select the far left point in the horizontal row, as shown.

Figure 48
9. Click Auto Fan from the menu manager.
10. Type 5 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
11. Minimize the sub-window. Notice that it minimizes in the graphics window.

12. Click Flat Orient > Vertical > Done/Return > Done/Quit from the menu manager.
13. Click Regenerate > Automatic from the menu manager.

Figure 49
14. Enable Plane Display .
15. Orient to the FRONT view orientation by doing the following:

 From the In Graphics toolbar, click Named Views and select Reorient .
 Select datum planes FLAT_HARNESS_FRONT and FLAT_HARNESS_TOP, respectively.

 Expand the Saved Views pane.

 Type FRONT as the Name and click Save.


 Click OK.
16. Disable Plane Display .

Figure 50
17. Adjust the harness segments by doing the following:

 Click Flatten > Move Segment from the menu manager.


 Select and drag the harness segments, approximately as shown.
Figure 51
18. Assemble the harness connectors by doing the following:

 Click Components > Assemble All from the menu manager.

Figure 52
19. Spin the model to the approximate orientation shown.

Figure 53
20. Redefine the M-01 connector orientation by doing the following:

 Click Redefine from the menu manager.


 Select the M-01 connector in the graphics window.

 Click Orient.
 Select the surface shown.

 Select the datum plane FLAT_HARNESS_FRONT from the model tree.

 Click Yellow from the menu manager.


 Click Done.

Figure 54
21. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Named Views and select FRONT.
22. Redefine the other connector orientations by doing the following:

 Click Redefine from the menu manager.


 Select the C-01 connector from the graphics window.

 Click Orient Angle.


 Type 180 and press ENTER.
23. Repeat this process to reorient the remaining three connectors by 180 degrees.

Figure 55
24. If necessary, move the end segments leading into the four smaller connectors as close as possible to
each entry port.

25. Fan out the components by doing the following:

 Click Components > Fan Out from the menu manager.


 Select one of the four small connectors.

26. Repeat this process for the other three small connectors.

27. Click Done/Quit.


 The loose wire ends should snap to their nearby coordinate systems and become wavy because
they are longer than their neighboring segments.

 If the wires do not fan, move the loose segment closer to its coordinate system at the port
openings and try the fan out process again.

 If the wires still do not fan, leave the segment as close to the port openings as possible. This
portion of the process is for visual representation only.

28. Edit the wire segment angles at the connectors by doing the following:

 Click Modify from the menu manager.


 Select the long red wire segment and edit the angle value to 20.
 Select the short red wire segment and edit its angle value to 20.
29. Repeat this process to modify the angles for both orange wire segments.

30. Select the gray wire segment and edit its angle value to 10.
31. Select the white wire segment and edit its angle value to 10.
32. Click Regenerate > Automatic from the menu manager.

Figure 56
33. Edit the background to the Default display.

 Click File > Options and then select System Colors.


 In the Color Scheme drop-down menu, select Default and then click OK.
34. Click File > Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
35. Enable Thick Cables .
1. Step 4. Create a drawing of the cable harness.
1. Create a new drawing, CHARGER.DRW, by doing the following:
 From the Quick Access toolbar, click New and select Drawing as the Type.
 Edit the Name to CHARGER.
 Clear the Use default template check box and click OK.
 Verify that CABLING.ASM is the Default Model.

 Select the Empty with format option.


 Click Browse, click Working Directory , and double-click C_FORMAT_GENERIC.FRM.
 Click OK in the New Drawing dialog box.
 Type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER.

Figure 57
2. Insert a general view into the drawing by doing the following:

 Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert General View.


 Select No Combined State, if necessary, and click OK.
 Click in the lower-left corner of the drawing to place the view.

 In the Drawing View dialog box, select the View Display Category and edit the Display style
to Shading.
 Select the Scale Category, select Custom Scale, and edit the value to 0.75.
 Click OK.

Figure 58
3. In the model tree, right-click SHRINKWRAP ID 40 and select Hide In Model.
4. Ensuring Current view is selected, right-click in the graphics window and disable Lock View
Movement.
5. Move the view, as necessary.
Figure 59
6. Add the flat harness as a model to the drawing by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, click Drawing Models from the Model Views group of the Layout tab.
 Click Add Model from the menu manager.
 In the Open dialog box, click In Session and double-click HARN_FLAT.ASM.
 Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
7. For visibility of white wires, modify the background to Dark Background.

 Click File > Options and then select System Colors.


 In the Color Scheme drop-down menu, select Dark Background and then click OK.
8. Insert a general view into the drawing by doing the following:

 Right-click in the graphics window and select Insert General View.


 Select No Combined State, if necessary, and click OK.
 Click in the upper-left corner of the drawing to place the view.

 In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT from the Model view names list and click Apply.
 Select the View Display Category and edit the Display style to No Hidden.
 Select The model in the Colors come from section.
 Select the Scale Category, select Custom Scale, and edit the value to 0.75.
 Click OK.
9. Move the view, as necessary.
Figure 60
10. Display the reference designators by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, select the Annotate tab.


 Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
 In the Show Model Annotations dialog box, select Note Tab .
 Select the upper-left view.

 Select the five check boxes for Note_0 through Note_4 and click OK.
11. Select and move the notes, as appropriate.

Figure 61
12. Add the harness model to the drawing by doing the following:

 Select the Layout tab.


 Click Drawing Models from the Model views group.
 Click Add Model from the menu manager.
 In the Open dialog box, click In Session and double-click HARNESS.PRT.
 Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
13. Insert a table into the drawing by doing the following:

 In the ribbon, select the Table tab.


 Click Table From File from the Table group.
 Double-click charger_harn_from-to.tbl.
 Click in the drawing to place the table, moving it as necessary.

 Examine the From-To, Spool, and Length data in the table.


Figure 62
14. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
15. From the Quick Access toolbar, click Close to return to CHARGER.ASM.
16. To view the 3-D model more easily, use the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select System Colors and then select Default as the Color Scheme and click OK.
17. Right-click COVER.PRT and select Unhide.

Figure 63
This completes the procedure.
Creating Harness Assembly Structures
Module Overview:
This module introduces you to the cabling assembly structure and how to create it. When developing
cable harness assemblies, skeletons and data sharing tools such as copy geometry and shrinkwrap
enable the controlled transfer of model geometry. You also learn how to create and configure the
connectors, and then assemble them into the structure.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Understand the cabling assembly structure.

 Understand the various electrical assembly structure possibilities.

 Utilize simplified representations for cabling.

 Create cabling assembly structures.

 Share routing geometry using copy geometry and shrinkwrap.

 Create and configure connectors.

 Assemble connectors.
Concept: Understanding Cabling Assembly
Structure
Planning the Cabling Assembly
When starting a 3-D harness design, it is important to consider the structure of the harness and the
assembly in which it resides. Taking time to consider these issues helps ensure the following:

 The model best represents the physical assembly to ensure a correct harness Bill of Materials.

 Effective control of external references.

 An appropriate level of detail in the design.

 Desired mass properties.

The following methods should be considered when planning an assembly structure:

 Using skeletons as a design framework.

 Using data sharing tools, such as copy geometry, to transfer geometry information throughout a
design.

 Using large assembly management tools, such as simplified representations, to create a more
lightweight and manageable assembly.

 Structure of the assembly itself, in terms of hierarchy of components and skeletons, to ensure
that required Bills of Material are created.

 The level of detail included in electrical components and connectors.

 Time saving methods, such as using component interfaces, when designing and assembling
electrical connectors and their receiving components.

Electrical Structure Guidelines


When developing a harness design, it is important to adhere to the following guidelines:

 Plan and create the assembly structure first, and then start the harness model.

 Adhere to your company's Bill of Material (BOM) and part numbering structure.

 Create one harness per electrical assembly. Create sub-harnesses to divide large harnesses
into logical subsections.

 Figure 1 displays a complete design assembly with three possible electrical assembly structures,
each one inside a dashed box. These structures can be applied to satisfy different design
requirements. Each of these structures is covered in greater detail in subsequent topics.
Figure 1 – Complete Design Assembly with Three Possible Electrical Assembly Structures
Concept: Understanding Electrical Assembly
Structure: Sub-Assembly
Understanding Electrical Assembly Structure: Sub-Assembly
Using this technique, the electrical assembly is created as a sub-assembly within each respective
mechanical sub-assembly, as shown in Figure 1. This option is best used when the electrical sub-
assembly part number is required in the mechanical sub-assembly Bill of Material. A good example of
when this technique can be used is when designing with prefabricated cables.
As shown in Figure 1, the electrical sub-assembly is created within its respective mechanical sub-
assembly. Note that with this option, the whole harness or sub-harness is flattened as one. Figure 1
also demonstrates how data sharing features can be used to transfer information into the electrical
skeleton from various mechanical components.

Figure 1 – Electrical Sub-Assembly Created within the Mechanical Sub-Assembly


Concept: Understanding Electrical Assembly
Structure: No Sub-Assembly
Understanding Electrical Assembly Structure: No Sub-Assembly
Using this technique, you do not use an electrical assembly. Instead, the electrical components are
created directly within each respective mechanical sub-assembly, as shown in Figure 1. This option is
best used when electrical component part numbers are required in the mechanical sub-assembly Bill
of Material.
As shown in Figure 1, the electrical harness is created directly in the mechanical sub-assembly. This
technique can be used if flat harnesses or sub-harnesses are not required. Notice that data sharing
features are not required to transfer design information, since electrical skeleton is not created.

Figure 1 – Electrical Harness Created Directly in the Mechanical Sub-Assembly


Concept: Understanding Electrical Assembly
Structure: Sub-Assemblies at Top Level
Understanding Electrical Assembly Structure: Sub-Assemblies at Top
Level
Using this technique, the electrical assembly is created as a sub-assembly at the top level of the main
assembly, as shown in Figure 1. This option is best used when harnesses connect components from
different mechanical assemblies. A good example of when this technique can be used is when
configuring prefabricated cables at the top-level.

As shown in Figure 1, the electrical sub-assemblies are created at the top-level. Note that with this
option, the whole harness or all sub-harnesses are flattened. Data sharing features can be used to
transfer geometry from various mechanical components into the electrical skeleton.

Figure 1 – Electrical Sub-Assemblies Created at the Top-Level Assembly

This technique is used in this course.


Concept: Utilizing Simplified Representations for
Cabling
Utilizing Simplified Representations for Cabling
Simplified representations can be used to tailor the amount and complexity of geometry to simplify the
routing of wires and cables.

Figure 1 – Work Region Simplified Representation


Simplified representations can be used to remove components from the graphics display and from
system memory, if desired.

Simplified representations can also be used to specify part-level representations for certain
components. Part-level simplified representations that are useful for Cabling include:

 Work region – Enables you to create cutaways on enclosures to view the inside and easily route
cables.

 Excluded features – Enables you to select features from models that can be excluded for routing
purposes, such as details from components or connectors.
Figure 2 – Excluded Features Simplified Representation
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Simplified-Reps folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create a simplified representation in BASE.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the model tree, right-click BASE.PRT and select Open.


3. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar.
 Select the Simp Rep tab.
 Click New and type cutaway, then press ENTER.

Figure 1
4. In the menu manager, click Work Region > Extrude > Solid > Done.
5. Select the front surface as the Sketch Plane.

Figure 2
6. Enable only the following Sketcher Display types: .

7. Click Sketch View from the In Graphics toolbar.


8. Click References from the Setup group.
 Select the two vertical references shown and click Close.
Figure 3
9. Select Line Chain from the Line types drop-down menu in the Sketching group, then sketch a
horizontal line as shown.
10. Edit the dimension to 15.

Figure 4
11. Click OK .
12. In the Extrude dashboard, edit the depth to Through All .
13. In the graphics window, click the material direction arrow to flip it up.

Figure 5
14. Click Complete Feature .
15. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
16. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
17. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep.
 Click Close.
18. Click Close from the Quick Access toolbar to return to PANEL.ASM.
1. Task 2. Create a simplified representation in MODULE.PRT.
1. In the model tree, right-click MODULE.PRT and select Open.
2. Click View Manager . Then click New, type no_details, and press ENTER.

Figure 6
3. In the menu manager, click Features > Exclude.
4. Select a patterned fin cut and base feature Extrude 3, as shown.

Figure 7
5. Click Done > Done/Return from the menu manager.
Figure 8
6. In the view manager, double-click Master Rep and click Close.
7. Click Close to return to PANEL.ASM.
1. Task 3. View the component simplified representations in the assembly.
1. In the model tree, right-click BASE.PRT and select Set Representation to > User Defined.
2. Select CUTAWAY and click Apply.
3. In the model tree, right-click MODULE.PRT and select Set Representation to > User Defined.
4. Select NO_DETAILS and click Apply.
5. In the model tree, right-click REGULATOR.PRT and select Set Representation to > Exclude.

Figure 9

6. Click View Manager .


 Right-click Master Rep and select Save.
 Edit the Simplified Rep name to cabling and click OK.
 Click Close.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Cabling Assembly Structures
Creating Cabling Assembly Structures
When creating cabling assembly structures, it is important to create skeletons, use data sharing to
enable selective copying of non-solid references, and employ layers to manage the display of datum
features.

Figure 1 – Cabling Assembly Structure


Utilizing Skeletons
Skeletons are used within Cabling sub-assemblies to contain routing geometry created using data
sharing features. Routing geometry typically contains surfaces as well as datum features, including
axes, coordinate systems, and datum points.

Transferring only routing geometry into the skeleton provides a lightweight representation of the
assembly for use in cable routing. Modifications made to the top-level components are transferred to
the skeleton, and in turn are passed on to the wire routing.

You can also create multiple skeletons using the configuration option multiple_skeletons_allowed.
Multiple skeletons can be created to represent different portions of an assembly, which may require
different wire harnesses, for example.

Utilizing Data Sharing


There are various data sharing tools that enable selective copying of non-solid references between
components.

Figure 2 – Sharing Data


These references can include:
 Surfaces

 Datum features, including planes, coordinate systems, axes, and points

The data sharing tools include:

 Publish Geometry – Enables you to specify a collection of geometry to be referenced


downstream by a copy geometry feature.

 Copy Geometry – Enables selective copying of surfaces and datum geometry from a single
model to another model.

 Shrinkwrap – A comprehensive tool that enables you to copy model surfaces and datum
references from any number of components.

Utilizing Layers
In the context of cabling, layers enable you to manage the display of coordinate systems and
reference datums, such as axes.

Figure 3 – Managing Layers


It is useful to create layers of the same name in components and connectors. This enables you to use
cascading layer control in assemblies, thus providing simplified layer control at the upper assembly
levels.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Assembly-Structure folder and click OK

1. Task 1. Create and assemble CABLING.ASM.


1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
2. In the Open dialog box, select PANEL.ASM.

 Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down menu.


 Select CABLING and click OK.

Figure 1
3. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

4. To be able to view the 3-D model more easily, load specific configuration options:

 Click File > Options.


 Click Configuration Editor and select Import configuration file from the Import/Export drop-
down menu.
 Click Working Directory .
 Select config.pro and click Open.
 Click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
 Click No in the Creo Parametric Options message window.
5. In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group.
6. Select Subassembly as the Type and Standard as the Sub-type.
7. Type CABLING as the Name and click OK.
8. In the Creation Options dialog box, click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.
9. Verify that the Leave Component Unplaced check box is cleared and click OK.
10. Right-click and select Default Constraint.
 Click Complete Component in the Component Placement dashboard.
Figure 2
1. Task 2. Create a skeleton in CABLING.ASM.
1. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters.
2. Select the Features check box from the Display types and click OK.
3. In the model tree, right-click CABLING.ASM and select Activate.
4. In the ribbon, click Create from the Component group.
5. Select Skeleton Model as the Type and Standard as the Sub-type.
6. Type CABLING_SKEL as the Name, if necessary, and click OK.
7. Click Browse and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
 Click OK.

Figure 3
8. In the model tree, expand CABLING.ASM and CABLING_SKEL.PRT.

9. Press CTRL and select the three default datum planes in both CABLING.ASM and
CABLING_SKEL.PRT.

10. Right-click and select Hide.


Figure 4
1. Task 3. Manage layers in the assembly.
1. In the model tree, right-click PANEL.ASM and select Activate.
2. Click Show and select Layer Tree.
3. In the layer tree, expand the CSYS_ASM-COMP layer and select it.

4. Notice the coordinate systems to be used later for assembling connectors.

Figure 5
5. In the layer tree, expand the ROUTING_DTMS layer and select it.

6. Notice the routing axes.

Figure 6
7. Right-click ROUTING_DTMS and select Hide.
8. Right-click in the layer tree and select Save Status.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Sharing Routing Geometry using Copy
Geometry
Sharing Routing Geometry using Copy Geometry
Copy Geometry features enable you to transfer geometry from one model to another. This geometry
ultimately serves as routing references. You can select geometry in the form of surfaces, edges, or
datum features as you are creating the Copy Geometry feature, or you can select an existing Publish
Geometry feature.

Figure 1 – Creating a Publish Geometry Feature


By selecting a Publish Geometry feature, you are copying an entire selection set at once.
You can select multiple surfaces, geometry, datum features, and so on in a single Copy Geometry
feature. However, you can only select from one model at a time. Therefore, you typically create
multiple Copy Geometry features in a cabling skeleton.
Publish Geometry Features
Publish Geometry features can be created in models to make copy geometry creation more efficient.
Publish Geometry features are simply selection sets of surfaces, edges, or datum references. This
selection set is stored in a feature called a Publish Geometry feature.

Publish Geometry features are optional.

Publish Geometry features can be selected during copy geometry creation.


Figure 2 – Selecting a Publish Geometry Feature
This enables you to select an entire selection set with a single action. You can create multiple publish
geometry features in a model. For example, you may create one publish geometry feature that
contains references for modeling a mating part, and you may create another publish geometry feature
for specific cabling references.

Figure 3 – Completed Publish Geometry Feature


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Copy-Geometry folder and click OK

1. Task 1. Create a publish geometry feature.


1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
2. In the Open dialog box, select PANEL.ASM.

 Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down menu.


 Select CABLING and click OK.

Figure 1
3. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

4. In the model tree, right-click WALL.PRT and select Open.


5. Click Show and select Layer Tree.
6. Right-click ROUTING_DTMS and select Unhide.
7. Click the Model Intent group drop-down menu and select Publish Geometry .
8. Select the right main vertical surface.

9. Right-click and select Chains.


10. Press CTRL and select the outer top edge of each tab as shown.
Figure 2
11. Right-click and select References.
12. Press CTRL and select datum axes A_1 and A_2.

13. Click Apply in the Publish Geometry dialog box.


14. Click Close to return to PANEL.ASM.
1. Task 2. Create copy geometry features in the skeleton model.
1. To be able to view the 3-D model more easily, load specific configuration options:

 Click File > Options.


 Click Configuration Editor and select Import configuration file from the Import/Export drop-
down menu.
 Click Working Directory .
 Select config.pro and click Open.
 Click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
2. In the model tree, expand CABLING.ASM.

3. Right-click CABLING_SKEL.PRT and select Activate.


4. In the ribbon, click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
5. In the graphics window, select WALL.PRT to select the publish geometry feature.
Figure 3
6. Click Complete Feature from the Copy Geometry dashboard.
7. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
8. In the graphics window, select SOLENOID.PRT to select the publish geometry feature and
click Complete Feature .

Figure 4
9. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
10. In the graphics window, select MODULE.PRT to select the publish geometry feature and
click Complete Feature .

Figure 5
11. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
12. Click Published Geometry Only in the Copy Geometry dashboard to disable it.
13. Right-click and select Chains.
14. Zoom in on the top SOCKET_2PIN.PRT, right-click, and query to select the outer oval intent edge.
Figure 6
15. Right-click and select References.
16. Select datum coordinate system COMP.

17. Click Complete Feature .


18. Create a copy geometry feature for the other SOCKET_2PIN.PRT connector using the same
procedure.

19. Orient to the Standard Orientation.


20. Click Copy Geometry from the Get Data group.
21. Click Published Geometry Only to disable it.
22. Press CTRL and select the floor surface and left wall surface.

Figure 7
23. Click Complete Feature .
24. In the model tree, right-click CABLING.ASM and select Open.
25. Select Master Rep, if necessary, and click OK.
Figure 8
1. Task 3. Manage layers in the skeleton model.
1. In the model tree, right-click CABLING_SKEL.PRT and select Open.
2. Click Show and select Layer Tree.
3. Right-click and select New Layer.
4. Type ROUTING_DTMS as the Name.
5. Select datum axes A_1 and A_2 and click OK.

Figure 9
6. Right-click and select New Layer.
7. Type CSYS_ENTRY-PORTS as the Name.
8. Select all five COMP_XX coordinate systems and click OK.
9. Press CTRL and select both new layers, right-click, and select Hide.
10. Right-click and select Save Status.
Figure 10
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Sharing Routing Geometry using
Shrinkwrap
Shrinkwrap Feature Theory
Shrinkwrap features contain a collection of associatively copied surfaces and datums, representing
the exterior shape of a referenced part or assembly.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Assembly


Based on a specified collection method, the shrinkwrap feature automatically collects surfaces from
the source assembly, and copies them associatively into the shrinkwrap feature.

Figure 2 – Viewing the Shrinkwrap Feature


Because the surfaces are copied associatively, the shrinkwrap feature updates when modifications
are made to the assembly.

Sharing Routing Geometry Using Shrinkwrap


In the context of cabling, you can create a shrinkwrap feature to collect important references that are
used for routing. For example, you can collect datum features including coordinate systems that are
used for assembling connectors. You can collect the routing datums including axes and points. You
can also collect surfaces of components or the enclosure to ensure that you route cables around them
or within them. Unlike copy geometry features, you can select references from more than one model
and collect them in the same shrinkwrap feature.

Specifying the Subset


You can click Subset in the Shrinkwrap dashboard to open the Shrinkwrap Comps dialog box. Within
this dialog box, you can then select the components to be referenced or ignored in the shrinkwrap
creation process.
Surface Subset Collection Methods
In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, you can select from three surface subset collection methods to be used
in creation of the shrinkwrap feature:

 Outer Shell – Collects surfaces that represent the outer shell of the assembly.

 Autocollect all solid surfaces – Collects all solid surfaces in the assembly. The results of this
surface collection method can be converted to a solid shrinkwrap feature.

 Manual collection – Enables you to manually select any surfaces you want included in the
shrinkwrap feature.

Shrinkwrap References
You can specify geometry references that are always included or excluded from the shrinkwrap
feature:

Figure 3 – Selecting References


 Always include surfaces – Selects any geometry in the source model that should always be
included in the shrinkwrap feature.

 Never include surfaces – Selects any geometry in the source model that should never be
included in the shrinkwrap feature.

 Chain – Selects curves and surface geometry, adjacent to selected solid edges.

 Include Datums – Selects any datum features that should be included in the shrinkwrap feature.

Shrinkwrap Options
You can also control the automatic selection of geometry in the source model. The following options
are only available when using the Outer Shell collection method:

 Subset Options – Configures one of two creation options:

o Shrinkwrap then Exclude – Shrinkwraps the entire source model, then excludes geometry
from models that you have selected to never include.

o Exclude then Shrinkwrap – Excludes models that you have selected to never include, then
shrinkwraps the model.

 Quality Level – Enables you to edit the relative quality of the shrinkwrap feature creation process
to a value between 1 and 10. High quality levels increase the level of detail included in the
shrinkwrap feature, but also increase processing time and file size.
 Attributes – You can specify the following attributes which control the automatic selection of
shrinkwrap geometry:

o Auto Hole Filling – Fills all holes or cuts that intersect a single surface.

o Include Quilts – Selects quilts that should always be included in the shrinkwrap feature.

o Ignore Small Surfaces – Excludes surfaces that are smaller than the specified percentage
of the model's overall size.

 Dependent – Enables you to control the shrinkwrap feature's dependency. The shrinkwrap
feature is dependent on the source components by default. If you edit the size or position of the
original component, the shrinkwrap feature updates accordingly.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Shrinkwrap folder and click OK

1. Task 1. Insert a Shrinkwrap feature in the skeleton model.


1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
2. In the Open dialog box, select PANEL.ASM.

 Select Open Representation from the Open drop-down menu.


 Select CABLING and click OK.

Figure 1
3. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

 Notice that MODULE.PRT is intentionally set to its master rep. This is because the software
ignores any components not set as their master rep.

4. Click Show and select Layer Tree.


5. Right-click ROUTING_DTMS and select Unhide.
6. Click Show and select Model Tree.
7. To be able to view the 3-D model more easily, load specific configuration options:

 Click File > Options.


 Click Configuration Editor and select Import configuration file from the Import/Export drop-
down menu.
 Click Working Directory .
 Select config.pro and click Open.
 Click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
8. In the model tree, expand CABLING.ASM, right-click CABLING_SKEL.PRT, and select Activate.
9. In the ribbon, click Shrinkwrap from the Get Data group.
10. Click Subset in the Shrinkwrap dashboard.
11. In the Shrinkwrap Comps dialog box, select the CABLING.ASM check box two times to ignore it.
Figure 2
12. Click OK.
13. In the Shrinkwrap dashboard, edit the type to Outer Shell if necessary.
14. Select the References tab.
15. Click in the Always include surfaces collector to activate it.
16. Select the floor surface on BASE.PRT, right-click, and select Solid Surfaces.

Figure 3
 You must manually select the surfaces because the component is already in a simplified
representation.

17. On the References tab, click in the Include Datums collector to activate it.
18. Press CTRL and select all five COMP_XX coordinate systems.

19. Press CTRL and select datum axes A_1 and A_2.

Figure 4
20. Select the Options tab.
21. Edit the Quality Level to 3 and click OK, if necessary, to accept the Shrinkwrap Alert.
22. Click Complete Feature .
23. In the model tree, right-click CABLING.ASM and select Open.
24. Select Master Rep if necessary and click OK.

Figure 5
25. Notice the geometry now contained in the skeleton.

1. Task 2. Manage layers in the skeleton model.


1. In the model tree, right-click CABLING_SKEL.PRT and select Open.
2. Click Show and select Layer Tree.
3. Right-click and select New Layer.
4. Type ROUTING_DTMS as the Name.
5. Select datum axes A_1 and A_2 and click OK.

Figure 6
6. Right-click and select New Layer.
7. Type CSYS_ENTRY-PORTS as the Name.
8. Select all five COMP_XX coordinate systems and click OK.
9. Press CTRL and select both new layers, right-click, and select Hide.
10. Right-click and select Save Status.
Figure 7
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating and Configuring Connectors
Creating and Configuring Connectors
Connectors provide the attachment locations that are used when routing wires and cables. The
connector models are referenced when the logical referencing occurs. Connectors typically include
solid geometry representing the physical connector. They must contain at least one coordinate
system, which is to be used as the entry port for the wire or cable.

Wires enter and exit the entry ports along the positive Z-axis of the coordinate system. Therefore, the
Z-axis should always face out of the connector. The Y-axis is typically oriented to be along the
horizontal axis of the connector. For example, considering a connector with a single row of pins, the
Y-axis would lie in the plane in which the pins lie, as shown in figure 2.

Connectors can include other geometry or references that can be useful for routing wires and cables
in and out. References include both datum points and axes. For example, the spade connector in
figure 3 contains a ROUTE datum point as well as datum axis A_2.

Figure 3 – Configured Spade Connector


Connector Geometry Level of Detail
Be mindful of the level of detail you incorporate into connectors. A high level of detail, while
geometrically correct, can significantly impact your assembly performance. You do not need to create
the small details. Rather, a decent representation suffices in the assembly. Remember that there may
be hundreds of instances of the connector assembled. Any unneeded geometric details slow the
assembly performance. It is important to find a balance between the required connector model
accuracy and the “nice to have” geometry.

You can also manage the level of detail in the connector in other ways, including:

 Grouping all of the detail connector features together and then suppressing it.

 Creating a family table and turning off the detail features for a cabling version of the connector.
 Creating a part level simplified representation that excludes the detail features.

Figure 1 displays the original spade connector, showing all the detail.

Figure 1 – Spade Connector


Figure 3 displays the connector after all the detail features were grouped and suppressed.

Using Component Interfaces with Connectors


Connectors can contain an additional coordinate system that can be used to assemble the connector.
You can then use that coordinate system to create a component interface. The component interface is
then used to enable you to rapidly assemble the connectors.

Connectors with Multiple Pins


When creating connectors with multiple pins, as shown in Figure 2, there are two different methods
you can use to configure the connector:

 Single Entry Port – Causes the first wire to route directly into the Z-axis of the specified port.
Subsequently, wires neatly arrange themselves next to the previous wire, with the spacing
relative to the wire diameter. You can specify either of the following arrangement types:

o Round – Wires are arranged in a concentric circle formation around the Z-axis.

o Flat – Wires are arranged in a flat, “single file” pattern, by default. They can also be
arranged in rows and columns.

The single entry port method is faster, but because it simplifies the individual wire locations into
the connector, it is not as accurate.
 Multiple Entry Ports – Causes each separate wire to route independently to its own respective
entry port. This method is more time-consuming, but can be more accurate with wire and pin
locations.
Figure 2 – Single and Multiple Entry Port
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Connectors_Create folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click SPADE.PRT.

1. Task 1. Create a datum point and coordinate system to aid routing.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click the Datum group drop-down menu and select Point .


3. Click Plane from the Datum group to create an internal datum plane.
4. Prehighlight and select datum plane FRONT, then drag the new plane back to an offset of 8.
 Click OK.
5. Press CTRL and select datum axis A_2.

6. In the Datum Point dialog box, select the Properties tab and edit the Name to ROUTE.

Figure 1
7. Click OK and de-select all geometry.
 The ROUTE datum point is useful for routing a wire into the connector.

8. Click Coordinate System from the Datum group.


9. Prehighlight datum axis A_2 and then select it.

10. Click Plane to create an internal datum plane.


11. Prehighlight and select datum plane FRONT and drag the new plane in front of it to an offset of 3.
 Click OK.
Figure 2
12. Select the Orientation tab in the Coordinate System dialog box.
 Use the new datum plane DTM4 to determine Z.
 Click Flip so that the Z-axis faces down the tube.
 Click in the empty Use collector to activate it.
 Select datum plane RIGHT.

 Use datum plane RIGHT to project X.


 Select the Properties tab and edit the Name to ENTRY.
 Click OK and de-select all geometry.

Figure 3
1. Task 2. Create a component interface to aid routing.
1. In the ribbon, click Component Interface from the Model Intent group drop-down menu.
2. Select datum coordinate system CONN.

3. Click Apply in the Component Interface dialog box.

Figure 4
1. Task 3. Manage layers in the connector.
1. Click Show and select Layer Tree.
2. Right-click and select New Layer.
3. Type ROUTING_DTMS as the Name.
4. Select datum axis A_2 and datum point ROUTE and click OK.

Figure 5
5. Right-click and select New Layer.
6. Type CSYS_ENTRY-PORTS as the Name.
7. Prehighlight and select coordinate system ENTRY and click OK.
8. Press CTRL and select both new layers, right-click, and select Hide.
9. Right-click and select Save Status.
Figure 6

10. Click Show and select Model Tree.


1. Task 4. Conceal the connector details.
1. In the model tree, select feature Form 2.
2. Press SHIFT and select feature Round 1.
3. Right-click and select Group.
4. Right-click and select Suppress.
5. Click OK in the Suppress message window.

Figure 7
o You could also create a part level simplified representation and exclude the Group feature.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Assembling Connectors
Assembling Connectors
Connectors are typically assembled into the cabling assembly, and specifically the cabling skeleton
model, if possible.

Figure 1 – Assembling a Connector


Remember that connectors provide the attachment locations that are used when routing wires and
cables.
You can assemble connectors using any of the typical assembly constraints.
Figure 2 – Assembled Connectors
However, it is typically most efficient to assemble connectors using component interfaces. If
component interfaces are pre-created in each connector, and if coordinate systems are available in
the assembly components, the connector assembly can be done rapidly.
Figure 3 – Assembled Connector
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Connectors_Assemble folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Assemble connectors into the cabling assembly.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Click Show and select Layer Tree.


3. Right-click layer CSYS_ASM-CONN and select Unhide.
4. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.

Figure 1

5. In the ribbon, click Assemble from the Component group.


6. Double-click CONN_2PIN-SQ.PRT.

7. Click Close in the Auto Place dialog box, if necessary.


8. Select the rear socket COMP coordinate system.

9. Right-click and select New Location.


10. Select the front socket COMP_1 coordinate system.
Figure 2
11. Click Complete Component from the Component Placement dashboard.
12. Click Assemble and double-click CONN_2PIN-RND.PRT.
13. Click Close in the Auto Place dialog box if necessary.
14. Select the coordinate system on the left side of MODULE.PRT.

Figure 3
15. Click Complete Component .
16. Click Assemble and double-click CONN_9PIN.PRT.
17. Select the coordinate system on the front side of MODULE.PRT.
Figure 4
18. Click Complete Component .
19. Click Assemble and double-click SPADE.PRT.
20. Select the coordinate system on the SOLENOID.PRT.

Figure 5
21. Click Complete Component .
22. In the layer tree, right-click layer CSYS_ASM-CONN and select Hide.
23. Right-click and select Save Status.
24. Click Repaint .
25. Notice that the entry ports are now visible on the connectors.
Figure 6
This completes the procedure.
Setting Up for Cabling
Module Overview:
This module introduces you to Creo Parametric's cabling interface. Using the cabling interface, you
create the harness model as well as designate connectors and the entry ports to use for routing wires
and cables. You also create the spools to use for the wires and cables.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Understand the cabling interface.

 Create a harness part.

 Create a wire color appearance file.

 Manually designate connectors and entry ports.

 Create wire spools.

 Create cable spools.

 Create ribbon cable spools.


Concept: Understanding the Cabling Interface
Understanding the Cabling Interface
You can access the cabling interface in Cabling mode. You can access Cabling mode by using the
following steps :

 In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.

 Click Cabling from the Engineering group.


Once you are in Cabling mode, the Cabling ribbon appears.
The cabling interface consists of the following areas:

Figure 1 – The Cabling Interface

 Cabling Display toolbar – Located in the In Graphics toolbar across the top of the interface, the
Cabling Display toolbar contains the cabling display icons, including Center Line and Thick
Cables , as well as the Ref Designator Labels icon that toggles reference designator
labels on and off.
 Cabling toolbar – Located in the ribbon along the upper side of the interface, the Cabling toolbar
enables you to perform the various cabling functions for an assembly.

 Model tree – In Cabling mode, the model tree displays information regarding the cabling
assembly, including defined spools, cable network locations, cable and bundle segments, and
routed wires and cables. The model tree displays which routed wires are complete and which are
incomplete. It is possible to add additional information that is useful to cabling to the model tree
for easy reference. You can add the following types of information:

o Cable Info – You can add the following columns to the model tree:

 Designation – Enables you to specify which components have been designated within
the cabling assembly. For example, in Figure 1, component CONN_9PIN.PRT is
designated as connector M-01.

 Diameter
 Logical From

 Logical To

 Physical From

 Physical To

 Length

o Cabling Params – Enables you to display user-created parameter values.


Concept: Creating a Harness Part
Creating a Harness Part
Before routing wires or cables in an assembly, you must create a harness. A harness is a special type
of part file that contains all the individual wire and cable features within the assembly. When you
create a harness, it is named and saved as a .prt file, but it can only be accessed within Cabling mode
(or shown on a drawing) and cannot be opened in Part mode on its own.

Figure 1 – Viewing Harnesses


You can create several harnesses in the same assembly, but only one harness part is active at a
time. The model tree displays the active harness with a green asterisk symbol, similar to that of an
active model within a standard assembly. In Figure 1, the HARNESS_1.PRT is the active harness.
The name of the active harness is displayed in the graphics window, with the label WORK HARNESS,
as shown in Figure 1. As you create cabling features, they are automatically created in the active
harness. To select cabling entities that have been added to a particular harness, you must activate
that harness using the Cabling ribbon.

Click Create Harness to create a harness and new harness parameters. Click Modify
Harness to modify the harness.
You can use the template_harnesspart configuration option to specify the default template.

To delete a harness, you can simply select and delete the harness part from the model tree. The
harness part is removed from the assembly, and all cabling data in the harness part is deleted.
Creating Sub-Harnesses
To organize a large design, you can create sub-harnesses. A sub-harness is a portion of a harness
part, and is not a separate part file. You can use all of the entities available for harnesses when
working with sub-harnesses, but you can also work with sub-harnesses separately in Harness
Manufacturing (flattening) mode.

The sub-harness is visible in the model tree in the harness Footer node. To display a sub-harness on
the model tree, enable the display of features in the model tree and expand the Footer node beneath
the active harness part.

To set the default sub-harness, click the Modify Harness icon and then select the harness that
includes the sub-harness you wish to set as the default. You can then click Set Default and select the
desired sub-harness.
Copying Harnesses
You can copy a harness by clicking Copy Harness from the Harness group drop-down menu in the
Cabling ribbon. When you select the harness you wish to copy, the selected harness and
corresponding assembly are displayed in a separate window. Next, you select a connector in the
assembly to which you want to copy the harness, corresponding to the reference designator of the
component or connector in the assembly from which the harness is being copied. A new reference
designator is assigned to the reference model. Once you have selected all connectors, you can
specify a new harness name.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Harness-Part_Create folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create harness parts and sub-harness parts in an assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Click Settings from the model tree and select Tree Filters.
3. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box in the Display category and
click OK.
4. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
5. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
6. Click Create Harness from the Harness group.
 Type HARNESS_1 as the Name and click OK.
 Click Browse from the New File Options dialog box.
 Click Working Directory and double-click MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
 Click OK.

Figure 1

7. Click Create Harness and create another new harness named HARNESS_2. Accept the same
template model MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT.
8. In the model tree, notice that HARNESS_2.PRT is now the active model.
Figure 2

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group.


10. Select HARNESS_1 from the menu manager.

11. In the model tree, notice that HARNESS_1.PRT is now the active model.

12. In the menu manager, notice that the Subharness menu now displays.

 Click Setup > Add.


 Type SUBHARNESS_1 and press ENTER.
13. In the model tree, expand HARNESS_1.PRT and its Footer node.

14. Notice the sub-harness.

Figure 3
15. Click Set Default from the menu manager and select SUBHARNESS_1.
16. Notice that SUBHARNESS_1 is now displayed in the graphics window.

Figure 4
17. Click Clear Default from the menu manager and click Yes in the Confirmation message window.
18. Notice that SUBHARNESS_1 is now removed from the graphics window.

Figure 5
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating a Wire Color Appearance File
The Appearances Manager
The Appearances Manager enables you to create and manage your appearances, as well as load
existing appearance files. You access the Appearances Manager by clicking Appearance
Gallery from the ribbon and selecting Appearances Manager . The Appearances Manager
dialog box contains both the contents of the appearance gallery and the appearance editor.
Creating and Editing Appearances
An appearance consists of both Color and Highlight Color. You can modify the properties of both
within the appearance editor to create your desired appearance. You can even apply textures and
decals to your appearance.

Figure 1 – Color Editor


To edit an appearance within the Appearances Manager, you must first copy it into the My
Appearances palette. You can copy the appearance from the Library palette or Model palette by right-
clicking and selecting Copy to My Appearances. You can also select an appearance in the My
Appearances palette and click New Appearance , which copies the appearance to a new name.
Additionally, you can edit an appearance by right-clicking it in the appearance gallery and selecting
Edit. This launches the appearance editor.
Figure 2 – Appearances Manager
Use preexisting appearances as a starting point to quickly and easily create new appearances.

Creating a Wire Color Appearance File


Typically, you create an appearances file specifically used for cabling. Create appearances within the
file that represent your desired wire and cable colors. Name your appearances with a color naming
convention. When you define new spools, the color names are specified so that wires created from
those spools are automatically assigned the desired appearance.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Appearance_Wire folder and click OK

1. Task 1. Create a wire color appearance file.


1. Click File > New.
2. In the New dialog box, type APPEARANCE and press ENTER.

Figure 1
3. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

4. In the ribbon, select the Render tab.


5. Click Appearance Gallery from the Appearance group and select Appearances Manager .

Figure 2
6. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, click File > Open and double-click the
existing wire_colors.dmt file.
7. Click Override all in the Warning message window.

Figure 3
 These steps are used to load a wire color palette before routing wires.

8. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, select the green sphere.

9. Notice the spelling of the appearance name grn.


10. Select the yellow sphere and notice the spelling of the appearance name yel.

Figure 4
 These color appearance names should match the color names defined in the spools.

11. In the Appearances Manager dialog box, click New Appearance , edit the Name to red, and press
ENTER.
 In the Basic tab, click the color rectangle to edit the color.

 Edit the RGB colors to 200, 0, and 0, respectively.


 Click OK.
Figure 5
12. Click File > Save As in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
13. Select the wire_colors.dmt file and click OK.
14. Click OK to overwrite the existing file.
15. Click Close.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Manually Designating Connector and
Entry Ports
Designating Components as Connectors
An assembly component must be designated as a connector before you can use it as a connector in a
cabling assembly.

Figure 1 – Specifying a Component to Designate


Designation makes the component eligible to carry pin and entry port information for cabling.

Figure 2 – Defining the Entry Port


Cabling also supports the concept of sub-connectors.
Figure 3 – Port Type Options
An example of sub-connectors is the individual contacts on a relay. In a 3-D assembly, the relay
assembly would contain the parts for the individual contacts.
You can change the designation of a connector by designating it again or by modifying its parameters.

Entry Ports
You specify coordinate systems for the entry ports on the connector. The entry ports define the
location where wires enter a connector. The coordinate systems for the entry ports must be created in
the part model before the part is designated as a connector.

When routing wires, you can use the RMB > Allow undesignated CSYS option. This enables you
to select previously undesignated coordinate systems and designate them on-the-fly.

Designate Steps
Use the following steps to designate components:

1. Select the component that is to be the connector.

2. Define the connector parameters (optional).

3. Define the sub-connector (optional).

4. Select the entry ports:

o Select the coordinate system on the connector model to which the wires route.

o You can select multiple coordinate systems by pressing CTRL.

o Remember that wires always route into the +Z-Axis.

5. Define the internal length.


6. Specify the port type:

o Wire – Only allows a single wire


connection into this port type.

o Round – Allows multiple wires into this


port type. As subsequent wires are
created, they are arranged into concentric
rings around the initial wire.

o Flat – Allows multiple wires into this


port type. As subsequent wires are
created, they are arranged into a flat row
from the initial wire.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Designate_Manual folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Manually designate the connectors.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group.
5. Click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu manager.
6. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
7. Select the M-01 connector and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.

Figure 1
8. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager and select the corresponding ENTRY coordinate system.
 Click OK.
9. Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
10. Click FLAT > Done > Done.
11. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
12. Select the M-02 connector and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.
Figure 2
13. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager, press CTRL, and select both corresponding ENTRY
coordinate systems.
 Click OK.
14. Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
15. Click ROUND > Done > Done.
16. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
17. Select the C-01 connector and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.

Figure 3
18. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager, press CTRL, and select both corresponding ENTRY
coordinate systems.
 Click OK.
19. Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
20. Click ROUND > Done > Done.
21. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
22. Select the C-02 connector and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.
Figure 4
23. Press ENTER again to accept the _1 reference designator name.

24. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager, press CTRL, and select both corresponding ENTRY
coordinate systems.
 Click OK.
25. Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
26. Click ROUND > Done > Done.
27. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu in the Logical Data group.
28. Select the S-01 connector and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.

Figure 5
29. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager and select the corresponding ENTRY coordinate system.
 Click OK.
30. Type 2 as the internal length and press ENTER.
31. Click WIRE > Done > Done.
1. Task 2. Edit the connector reference designator names.
1. Select Cabling Parameters from the Components group.
2. Press CTRL and select the connectors in the same order they were designated.

 Click OK.
Figure 6
3. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the REF_DES column values, as shown.

 Click Apply > OK.

Figure 7

4. Disable Csys Display .


5. Click Ref Designator Labels from the In Graphics toolbar to enable their display.

Figure 8
 Alternatively, you could have used the multi-coordinate system method for the Module 9-pin (M-
01) connector and used a coordinate system for each wire.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Creating Wire Spools
Creating Spools
Within Cabling mode, a “spool” file represents a physical bulk roll or reel of wire from which the
system pulls wire when routing in an assembly.

Figure 1 – Wire Spool Parameters

Each spool file has a unique set of parameters and values, such as wire thickness (outer diameter)
and color.

Figure 2 – Adding Wire Spool Parameters


This set of parameters for the cables or wires can be reused as needed, the same way a length of
wire is rolled off a reel spool. Cabling passes a unique set of parameters and values to the wire,
cable, or ribbon when it creates them. As you create each wire, cable, and ribbon, you select a
predefined spool.
The types of spools include:

 Wire spools – Used to create wires containing a single conductor.

 Cable spools – Used to create cables with multiple conductors.

 Ribbon spools – Used to create ribbon cables with multiple conductors arranged in a flat ribbon.

 Sheath spools – Created for bundles.


About Wire Spool Parameters
You must specify the wire spool parameter NAME in the Electrical Parameters dialog box. The name
of the wire spool must be unique. Creo Parametric sets the TYPE parameter to WIRE to differentiate
it from a cable spool. Other common but optional parameters that you can define in the wire spool are
COLOR and WIRE_GAUGE. The MIN_BEND_RADIUS parameter is automatically generated and
provides the required values for calculations in Harness Design.

Available Wire Spool Parameters


The following parameters are available when creating wire spools:

 NAME – Name of the spool file, specified in a text_string format.

 TYPE – The type of spool used. Wires are WIRE type, specified in a text_string format. This
parameter is read-only.

 MIN_BEND_RADIUS – The minimum bend radius allowed for the wire in harness part length
units; for example, 0.3.

 THICKNESS – The diameter of the wire; for example, 0.1.

 UNITS – Specifies the units used for measurement of wires. This parameter is used by
CABLING in conjunction with the DENSITY parameter to determine the mass of a wire. The
default value is the units specified in the cabling assembly; for example, MM.

 COLOR – The color of the wire, specified in a text_string format. The default value is
UNDEFINED.

 WIRE_GAUGE – The wire gauge, specified in a text_string format; for example, 18AWG.

The following are optional parameters:

 COLOR_CODE – The color code of the wire, specified in a text_string format.

 DENSITY – The linear density of the spool in mass/unit length. This parameter is used when
referencing a diagram to determine mass properties.

 INSUL_TYPE – The insulation type, specified in a text_string format.

 LINEAR_RESISTANCE

 MASS_UNITS – The units of mass for a wire; for example, KG. This parameter is used to
determine the mass properties of 3-D wires that reference the diagram.

 SHIELD_TYPE

 WIRE_CONSTRUCTION – The wire construction,SINGLE_STRAND, for example, specified in a


text_string format.

 User-Defined – Establishes a user-defined parameter, which can be accessed in the same way
as other spool parameters. For example, a parameter called MANUFACTURER may be created,
with a value of Xcorp.

Considerations When Working with Wire Spools


When working with wire spools, keep in mind the following:
 When you define a spool, you can write it to a text file with a .spl extension. You can then read
this file into a new cabling design.

 Setting the pro_spool_dir configuration option enables you to specify a directory from which
spools can be read. If you do not specify a directory, the current working directory is the default.

 You can retrieve the spool parameters using Report tables on a drawing and use these
parameters to display the wire or cable labels.

 If you create spool files in a text editor outside of Creo Parametric, the name of the spool (*.spl)
file must be identical to the spool name parameter within the file.

 Spools are automatically created when you use the Logical Reference source, such as data from
a Creo Schematics Design.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Spools_Wire folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Read in two spools for a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group.
5. Click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu manager.
6. Click Settings from the model tree and select Tree Filters.
7. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box in the Display category and
click OK.
8. Click Spools from the Logical Data group.
9. Click Read from the menu manager.
10. In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory and select both the 16_BLACK.SPL and
16_GREEN.SPL spools.
 Click Open.

Figure 1
11. Click Edit from the menu manager, select the 16_BLACK spool, and click OK.
12. Review the parameters for the black wire spool.

Figure 2
Figure 3
13. Click Cancel.
14. Click Edit from the menu manager, select the 16_GREEN spool, and click OK.
15. Review the parameters for the green wire spool.

Figure 4

Figure 5
16. Click Cancel.
1. Task 2. Create a new wire spool.
1. Click Create > Wire from the menu manager.
2. Type 14_RED as the spool name and press ENTER.
3. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the parameters for the 14_RED spool, as shown.

Figure 6
4. Click View > Columns in the Electrical Parameters dialog box.
5. Notice the other available columns.

6. Select the COLOR column and click Add Column .


7. Select the WIRE_GAUGE column and click Add Column .
8. Click Apply and then click OK.
9. Edit the COLOR value to red.
10. Edit the WIRE_GAUGE value to 14.

Figure 7
11. Click Apply and then click OK.
12. Click Edit from the menu manager.
13. Press CTRL and select the 14_RED, 16_BLACK, and 16_GREEN spools, and click OK.
14. View the parameters.

15. Edit the NAME_FORMAT value for the 14_RED spool to W-##.

Figure 8
16. Click Apply and then click OK.
17. Click Write from the menu manager.
18. Select the 14_RED spool and click OK.
19. Click Done/Return.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Cable Spools
Creating Spools
Within Cabling mode, a “spool” file represents a physical bulk roll or reel of wire from which the
system pulls wire when routing in an assembly.

Figure 1 – Connection Parameters

Each spool file has a unique set of parameters and values, such as wire thickness (outer diameter)
and color.

Figure 2 – Conductor Parameters


This set of parameters for the cables or wires can be reused as needed, the same way a length of
wire is rolled off a reel spool. Cabling passes a unique set of parameters and values to the wire,
cable, or ribbon when it creates them. As you create each wire, cable, and ribbon, you select a
predefined spool.
The types of spools include:

 Wire spools – Used to create wires containing a single conductor.

 Cable spools – Used to create cables with multiple conductors.

 Ribbon spools – Used to create ribbon cables with multiple conductors arranged in a flat ribbon.

 Sheath spools – Created for bundles.

About Cable Spool Parameters


Cable spools have parameters similar to those required for wire spools. The difference is that a cable
has a defined number of conductors, and each conductor has its own defining parameters; for
example GAUGE or COLOR. All wire spool parameters are valid for cable spools. You must set the
NUM_CONDUCTORS parameter to define the number of insulated conductors in the cables created
from the cable spool.

Available Cable Spool Parameters


The following connection parameters are available when creating cable spools:

 NAME – Name of the spool file, specified in a text_string format.


 TYPE – The type of spool used. Cables are PREFAB type, specified in a text_string format. This
parameter is read-only.

 MIN_BEND_RADIUS – The minimum bend radius allowed for the cable in harness part length
units; for example, 0.3.

 THICKNESS – The diameter of the cable; for example, 0.1.

 UNITS – Specifies the units used for measurement of cables; for example, MM.

 NUM_CONDUCTORS – Specifies the number of conductors present in a cable.

 The following are optional connection parameters:

o LIN_CAP_TO_ITEM – Specifies the linear electric capacity between items.

o LIN_CAP_ITEM_TO_SHIELD – Specifies the linear electric capacity between items and the
shield.

o LIN_CAP_ASSEM_ITEM_TO_SHIELD – Specifies the linear electric capacity between


assembly items and the shield.

o MASS_UNITS – The units of mass for a wire; for example, KG.

o OUTER_SHIELD_LINEAR_RESISTANCE – Specifies the linear resistance of the wire’s


outer shielding.

o OUTER_SHIELD_THICKNESS – Specifies the thickness of the wire’s outer shielding.

o SHIELD_LINEAR_RESISTANCE – Specifies the linear resistance of the wire’s shielding.

o SHIELD_TYPE – The shield type for a cable, specified in a text_string format. If you set this
parameter, it alters the cable symbol and makes it a dashed line to specify shielding.

o WIRE_CONSTRUCTION – Specifies the wire construction for the cable, specified in a


text_string format.

o WIRE_GAUGE – The wire gauge, specified in a text_string format; for example, 18AWG.

o User-Defined

The following conductor parameters are available when creating cable spools:

 COLOR – The color of the individual conductor wire, specified in a text_string format.

 UNITS – Specifies the units used for measurement of the individual conductor; for example, MM.

 THICKNESS – The diameter of the individual conductor wire; for example, 0.1.

 WIRE_GAUGE – The conductor wire gauge, specified in a text_string format; for example,
18AWG.

 MIN_BEND_RADIUS – The minimum bend radius allowed for the conductor.

 TYPE – The type of spool used for the conductor wire, specified in a text_string format.

 The following are optional conductor parameters:

o COLOR_CODE – The color code of the cable, specified in a text_string format.


o DENSITY – The linear density of the spool in mass/unit length. This parameter is used
when referencing a diagram to determine mass properties.

o INSUL_TYPE – The insulation type, specified in a text_string format. The default value is
NONE.

o NAME – The conductor name, specified in a text_string format.

o WIRE_CONSTRUCTION – The wire construction, specified in a text_string format.

o User-Defined

Considerations When Working with Cable Spools


When working with cable spools, keep in mind the following:

 When you define a spool, you can write it to a text file with a .spl extension. You can then read
this file into a new cabling design.

 Setting the pro_spool_dir configuration option enables you to specify a directory from which
spools can be read. If you do not specify a directory, the current working directory is the default.

 You can retrieve the spool parameters using Report tables on a drawing and use these
parameters to display the wire or cable labels.

 If you create spool files in a text editor outside of Creo Parametric, the name of the spool (*.spl)
file must be identical to the spool name parameter within the file.

 Spools are automatically created when you use the Logical Reference source, such as data from
a Creo Schematics Design.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Spools_Cable folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Read in a cable spool for a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group.
5. Click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu manager.
6. Click Spools from the Logical Data group.
7. Click Read from the menu manager.
8. In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory and select the 3X16_CABLE.SPL spool.
 Click Open.
9. Click Edit from the menu manager, select the 3X16_CABLE spool, and click OK.
10. Review the Connection parameters for the cable.

Figure 1

Figure 2
11. Click View > Columns in the Electrical Parameters dialog box.
12. If necessary, select the COLOR column and click Add Column .
13. Click Apply and then click OK.
14. Edit the COLOR value to wht.

Figure 3
15. Click Apply.
16. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, select the Conductors option.
17. Expand the 3X16_CABLE node.

18. Expand the Conductors node.


19. Review the Conductor parameters.
Figure 4

Figure 5
20. Click OK.
1. Task 2. Create a new cable spool.
1. Click Create > Cable from the menu manager.
2. Type 2X14_CABLE as the spool name and press ENTER.
3. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the parameters for the 2X14_CABLE spool, as shown.

Figure 6

Figure 7
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the Conductors option in the Electrical Parameters dialog box.
6. Click View > Columns.
7. Select the COLOR column and click Add Column .
8. Add the THICKNESS, WIRE_GAUGE, and MIN_BEND_RADIUS columns, respectively.

9. Click Apply and then click OK.


Figure 8
10. Edit the values, as shown.

Figure 9
11. Click Apply and then click OK.
12. Click Write from the menu manager.
13. Select the 2X14_CABLE spool and click OK.
14. Click Done/Return.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Ribbon Cable Spools
Creating Spools
Within Cabling mode, a “spool” file represents a physical bulk roll or reel of wire from which the
system pulls wire when routing in an assembly.

Figure 1 – Connection Parameters

Each spool file has a unique set of parameters and values, such as wire thickness (outer diameter)
and color.

Figure 2 – Conductor Parameters


This set of parameters for the cables or wires can be reused as needed, the same way a length of
wire is rolled off a reel spool. Cabling passes a unique set of parameters and values to the wire,
cable, or ribbon when it creates them. As you create each wire, cable, and ribbon, you select a
predefined spool.
The types of spools include:

 Wire spools – Used to create wires containing a single conductor.

 Cable spools – Used to create cables with multiple conductors.

 Ribbon spools – Used to create ribbon cables with multiple conductors arranged in a flat ribbon.
A ribbon cable is a flat and wide cable. The conducting wires run parallel to each other on the
same flat plane. You can manipulate ribbon spools in the same way as cable spools.
 Sheath spools – Created for bundles.

About Ribbon Spool Parameters


You must set the ribbon spool parameter NAME in the Electrical Parameters dialog box. The name of
the ribbon spool must be unique. Creo Parametric sets the TYPE parameter to RIBBON to
differentiate it from a wire or cable spool. The MIN_BEND_RADIUS is the trajectory minimum bend
radius of a ribbon cable. Creo Parametric automatically sets the value of the MIN_BEND_RADIUS
parameter to a default value. You must set the NUM_CONDUCTORS parameter to define the number
of insulated conductors in the cables that are created from the ribbon spool.

Available Ribbon Spool Parameters


The following connection parameters are available when creating ribbon spools:

 NAME – Name of the spool file, specified in a text_string format.

 TYPE – The type of spool used. Ribbon cables are RIBBON type, specified in a text_string
format. This parameter is read-only.

 MIN_BEND_RADIUS – The minimum bend radius allowed for the ribbon.

 BEND_RADIUS – The default ribbon bend radius.

 THICKNESS – The width of the ribbon cable.

 UNITS – Specifies the units used for measurement of ribbon cables; for example, MM.

 NUM_CONDUCTORS – Specifies the number of conductors present in a ribbon cable.

 The following are optional connection parameters:

o COLOR – The color of the ribbon, specified in a text_string format.

o DENSITY – The linear density of the spool in mass/unit length. This parameter is used
when referencing a diagram to determine mass properties.

o MASS_UNITS

o WIDTH

o User-Defined

The following conductor parameters are available when creating ribbon spools:

 THICKNESS – The diameter of the conductor wire; for example, 0.1.

 MIN_BEND_RADIUS – The minimum bend radius allowed for the conductor.

 COLOR – The color of the individual conductor wire, specified in a text_string format.

 The following are optional Conductor Parameters:

o COLOR_CODE – The color code of the ribbon cable, specified in a text_string format.

o DENSITY – The linear density of the spool in mass/unit length. This parameter is used
when referencing a diagram to determine mass properties.
o INSUL_TYPE – The insulation type, specified in a text_string format. The default value is
NONE.

o NAME – The conductor name, specified in a text_string format.

o WIRE_CONSTRUCTION – The wire construction, specified in a text_string format.

o WIRE_GAUGE – The conductor wire gauge, specified in a text_string format; for example,
18AWG.

o User-Defined

Considerations When Working with Ribbon Spools


When working with ribbon spools, keep in mind the following:

 When you define a spool, you can write it to a text file with a .spl extension. You can then read
this file into a new cabling design.

 Setting the pro_spool_dir configuration option enables you to specify a directory from which
spools can be read. If you do not specify a directory, the current working directory is the default.

 You can retrieve the spool parameters using Report tables on a drawing and use these
parameters to display the wire or cable labels.

 If you create spool files in a text editor outside of Creo Parametric, the name of the spool (*.spl)
file must be identical to the spool name parameter within the file.

 Spools are automatically created when you use the Logical Reference source, such as data from
a Creo Schematics Design.

When you flatten ribbon cables in Harness mode, ribbon cable-specific information such as folds
and bends are not carried over from 3-D models to Harness Manufacturing.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Spools_Ribbon folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Read in a ribbon cable spool for a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group.
5. Click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu manager.
6. Click Spools from the Logical Data group.
7. Click Read from the menu manager.
8. In the Open dialog box, click Working Directory and select the RIBBON_15.SPL spool.
 Click Open.
9. Click Edit from the menu manager, select the RIBBON_15 spool, and click OK.
10. Review the Connection parameters for the ribbon cable.

Figure 1

Figure 2
11. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, select the Conductors option.
12. Expand the RIBBON_15 node.

13. Expand the Conductors node.


14. Review the Conductor parameters.
Figure 3
15. Click Cancel.
1. Task 2. Create a new ribbon cable spool.
1. Click Create > Ribbon from the menu manager.
2. Type RIBBON_5 as the spool name and press ENTER.
3. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the parameters for the RIBBON_5 spool, as shown.

Figure 4

Figure 5
4. Click Apply.
5. Select the Conductors option in the Electrical Parameters dialog box.
6. Click View > Columns.
7. Select the COLOR column and click Add Column .
8. Add the THICKNESS and MIN_BEND_RADIUS columns, respectively.

9. Click Apply and then click OK.


10. Expand the RIBBON_5 node.

11. Expand the Conductors node.


Figure 6
12. Edit the values, as shown.

Figure 7
13. Click Apply and then click OK.
14. Click Write from the menu manager.
15. Select the RIBBON_5 spool and click OK.
16. Click Done/Return.
This completes the procedure.
Routing Wires and Cables
Module Overview:
Now that the connectors are designated and their entry ports are defined, you can route wires, cables,
and ribbon cables between the connector entry ports. In this module, you learn how to route wires and
cables directly between ports, specify wire location points through which the wires must pass, and
how to make a wire or cable follow the routing of an existing wire or cable. You also learn how to
reroute existing wires and cables, or edit their locations.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Route wires using simple route.

 Insert and edit wire locations.

 Create wire locations from references.

 Route wires using follow cable.

 Reroute wires.

 Route cables and ribbon cables.


Concept: Routing Wires using Simple Route
Routing Wires using Simple Route
You can route wires in an assembly using Simple Route as the Route Type. The Simple Route option
connects the specified wire or wires between the selected connector entry points. To use the Simple
Route option, select Route Cables from the Route group to launch the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 1 – Route Cables Dialog Box

Within the Route cables dialog box, you then click New Wire to begin routing wires.
The following options are available in the Route cables dialog box:

 Cables/Wires selection area – Along the left side of the dialog box, this area enables you to view
the routed wires.

 Spool – Defines the spool to be used for routing the wire. You select the wire or wires in the
selection area and then define the spool.

 Name – Specifies the name of the wire to be routed.

 From reference – The connector coordinate system from which the wire is routed.

 To reference – The connector coordinate system to which the wire is routed.

 Route Type – Defines the method type used to route the specified wire or wires.

Routing Capabilities
The options in the Route cables dialog box enable you to perform the following:

 You can route multiple wires and then use partial selection for specific wire start and end points.
For example, you can route four wires that all start at the same point, and then route two wires to
one location, and the other two wires to another location.
Figure 2 – Routed Wires

Figure 3 – Routing Wires Between Connectors


 During the routing process, you can “unplug” a wire and plug it into a new location by editing the
To and From references. After a wire is routed, return to the Route cables dialog box to edit the
routing From and To references.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route-Wires folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route wires in a cabling assembly using simple route functionality.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Spools from the Logical Data group.
11. Click List from the menu manager.
12. Notice the variety of WIRE spools available.

 Click Close.

Figure 1
13. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
14. Click New Wire in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select 14_RED from the Spool drop-down list.

 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-02 connector.


 Notice the wire preview path.

Figure 2

Figure 3
15. With the To collector activated, select coordinate system ENTRY on the S-01 connector.
16. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 4

17. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done from
the menu manager.
18. Click Route Cables from the Route group and click New Wire four times to create four wires.
 Select the W-1 wire and select 16_BROWN from the Spool drop-down list.

 Edit the spools for the W-2, W-3, and W-4 wires to 16_GRAY, 16_GREEN, and 16_ORANGE,
respectively.

 Press CTRL and select all four wires in the dialog box.

 Click in the From collector to activate it.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-02 connector.
 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-01 connector.

Figure 5

Figure 6
19. Right-click in the graphics window and select From.
20. Notice that the From collector highlights in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

Figure 7
21. In the Route cables dialog box, press CTRL and click wires W-1 and W-2 to de-select them.

22. Right-click in the graphics window and select To.


23. Notice that the To collector highlights in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-02 connector.

Figure 8
24. In the Route cables dialog box, select wire W-1, press CTRL, and select wire W-2.

25. Right-click in the graphics window and select From.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the M-02 connector.

 Click OK.

Figure 9
26. In the graphics window, select the gray W-2 wire, right-click, and select Route.
27. Right-click and select To.
28. Select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-01 connector.

 Click Apply.
Figure 10
29. In the graphics window, select the orange W-4 wire.

30. Right-click and select To.


31. Select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

 Click OK.

Figure 11

32. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters.
33. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box from the Display types and
click OK.
34. Expand HARNESS_2.PRT in the model tree and view the features that were created.
Figure 12

35. Disable Csys Display .


36. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Thick Cables .
37. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Ref Designator Labels to disable their display.

Figure 13
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Inserting and Editing Wire Locations
Inserting and Editing Wire Locations
Once a wire or cable is routed, you can perform many operations on it, including the following:

 Insert locations – To insert a new location that the wire must pass through, select the wire then
right-click and select Insert locations.

Figure 1 – Inserting New Location Points


When you insert locations, keep in mind that there is a progression to how the wire routes
through the locations. The assumption is that you add wire locations in a default direction along
the wire, with the default direction being from the original From reference to the To
reference.When inserting locations, the following options are available:
o Reverse – You can reverse the direction of progression along the wire by right-clicking and
selecting Reverse. This option is only available for the first selected location. You can also
click Reverse Direction in the dashboard.
o Segments – You can select specific segments to add locations to by right-clicking and
selecting Segments.

 Edit Segment – You edit a wire segment by selecting the wire, right-clicking, and selecting Edit
Segment.

Figure 2 – Selecting a Segment for Editing


This operation enables you to drag location points as well as delete location points.
 Edit mode – You can enter Edit mode by clicking Edit Mode in the dashboard. Edit mode can
be used in various situations to “pause” the current tool or drag location points.
Figure 3 – Dragging a Location Point
Once enabled, you must click Complete Feature once to exit Edit mode, and a second time
to complete the tool in use.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Locations_Insert-Edit folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Insert and edit wire locations in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
10. In the graphics window, select the red W-1 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
11. Select the location shown.

Figure 1
12. Notice the orange highlighting, indicating the active segment is located on the front segment.

13. Select another new location, as shown. This adds to the active segment, and the progression is in this
direction.
Figure 2
14. Select a third location in the middle of the active orange segment.

15. Click Undo from the Quick Access toolbar to remove the third inserted location.
16. Cursor over the second, currently active location, right-click, and select Delete.
17. Right-click and select Reverse Direction.
18. This modifies the progression direction. Notice that the opposite segment is now the active orange
segment.

Figure 3
19. Select another location, as shown.

20. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.

Figure 4
21. In the graphics window, select the red W-1 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
22. Right-click and select Segment.
23. Select the middle segment.

Figure 5
24. Right-click and select Placement Reference.
25. Add a new location.
Figure 6
26. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.
27. In the graphics window, select the red W-1 wire, right-click, and select Edit Segment.
28. Click and drag the location to move it.

Figure 7
29. Right-click the location and select Delete.
30. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.
31. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Thick Cables .

Figure 8
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Wire Locations from
References
Creating Wire Locations from References
In addition to selecting arbitrary point locations for routing cables, you can also specify wire location
points from references. The following options are available for utilizing routing references:

 On – Select a CSYS, Point, Vertex, Location, Surface, Curve or Axis to define the primary
reference for this location. The Location is created on the selected reference. If a surface is
selected, a ‘free’ location is created and you can drag the location on the surface. If an axis is
selected, you can drag the location along the axis. If you drag the location to one end, you can
then right-click and select Along to create another location point automatically at the other axis
end.

Figure 1 – Selecting a Datum Axis


When routing along short axes, it is recommended you use a single routing location point.

 Use Direction – Select an edge, axis, or channel to define direction. The location point is created
offset from the previous point along the specified direction. You can drag the handle or edit the
offset value dimension.

Figure 2 – Using the Use Direction Option


 Offset From Point - Select a cable location to define the primary reference for the offset location.
Once the reference location is selected, you can select up to 3 references, such as CSYS, edge,
straight curve, channel or axis to define location offset.
 Offset From Previous – Similar to Offset from Point, except uses the previous cable location to
define the primary reference for the offset location. You can select up to 3 references, such as
CSYS, edge, straight curve, channel or axis to define location offset.

 Dependent – Creates a location point offset from two references that you specify. You can either
drag the reference handles onto the desired references, or select the references. This is similar
to locating a linear hole feature.

Figure 3 – Dependent Location Point


 Other established wire locations – You can select other existing routed wire location points as a
location point. The new location point for your wire is stacked next to the selected, existing
location, according to the wire grouping, whether round or flat.

Location points created using references are parametric. If the location points are modified, the wire
routing updates automatically. For example, if a component containing an axis is moved, and the axis
was specified as a location point, the routing updates. Or, if wire is routed through a series of location
points, and the location point dimensions are modified, the wire routing automatically updates.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Locations_References folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Insert wire locations in HARNESS_1.PRT by selecting references.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
10. In the graphics window, select the red W-1 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
11. Select the location shown.

Figure 1
12. In the graphics window, right-click and select Dependent.
13. Drag the handles to the two references.

14. Edit the values as shown, taking note of their sign.


Figure 2
15. Zoom in to the spade connector and notice the location of the active segment.

16. Select datum point ROUTE.

Figure 3
17. Select the location on axis A_2.

Figure 4
18. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.
1. Task 2. Insert wire locations in HARNESS_2.PRT by selecting references.
1. In the ribbon, select Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 >
Done from the menu manager.
2. Pan the model as shown.

3. In the graphics window, select the brown W-1 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
4. Select datum axis A_2.
Figure 5
5. Select the Items tab from the Location dashboard.
6. Notice that both the W-1 and W-2 wires are included by default. This is because both wire segments
have the same endpoints.

7. Drag the location to the far right of datum axis A_2.

8. Right-click and select Along to create a second location point at the other end of datum axis A_2.

Figure 6
9. Click Undo .
10. Click Repeat from the dashboard.
11. Select the brown W-1 wire.

12. Select the location on the surface.

13. Select the Items tab and clear the W-2 check box.
14. Move the location handle as necessary.
Figure 7
15. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.
16. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

17. Select the orange W-4 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
18. Select the surface, right-click, and select Next Location > Use Direction.
19. Select the upper horizontal edge and drag the location to –25.

Figure 8
 You can flip the location of the next location by right-clicking and selecting Reverse Direction.
20. In the graphics window, right-click and select Next Location > On.
Figure 9
21. Click the surface to create another location to the left of the previous location.

22. Right-click and select Next Location > Use Direction.


23. Select the upper horizontal edge and drag the location to –35.

Figure 10
24. Click Edit Mode from the dashboard.
25. Drag the location as shown.
Figure 11
26. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard, twice.
27. In the graphics window, select the green W-3 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
28. Select the first inserted location on the orange W-4 wire and click Repeat .
29. Select the green W-3 wire, select the second inserted location on the orange W-4 wire, and
click Repeat .
30. Select the green W-3 wire, select the third inserted location on the orange W-4 wire, and
click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.

Figure 12
31. Orient to the Standard Orientation.
32. Disable Axis Display and Point Display .
33. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Thick Cables .

Figure 13
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Routing Wires using Follow Cable
Routing Wires using Follow Cable
The Follow Cable option enables you to route wires such that they follow another wire or cable. In the
Route cables dialog box, you must edit the Route Type from Simple Route to Follow Cable and select
the existing wire or cable you wish the new wire to follow.

Figure 1 – Blue Wire Routed using Simple Route


You must then specify the From and To references on the existing wire or cable.

Figure 2 – Selecting To and From References


The new wire follows the routing of the existing wire or cable for the segments between the From and
To location point specified.

Figure 3 – Blue Wire Routed using Follow Cable


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Follow-Cable folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route wires in a cabling assembly using Follow Cable.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
10. Click Route Cables from the Route group.
11. Click New Wire in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select 16_BLUE from the Spool drop-down list.

 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

Figure 1
12. In the Route cables dialog box, select Follow Cable as the Route Type from the drop-down list.
 Select the red W-1 wire to follow.

 Select the first location point on the W-1 wire, closest to the M-01 connector, as
the From reference.
 Select the third location point on the W-1 wire as the To reference.
 Click OK.
Figure 2
13. In the graphics window, select the blue W-2 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
14. Select the two locations.

Figure 3
15. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.
16. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click New Wire twice to create
two wires.
 Edit the W-3 wire Spool to 16_WHITE, and the W-4 wire Spool to 16_BLACK.

 Press CTRL and select both wires.

 Click in the From collector to activate it.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.


Figure 4
17. In the Route cables dialog box, select Follow Cable as the Route Type.
 Select the blue W-2 wire to follow.

 Select the first location point on the W-2 wire, closest to the M-01 connector, as
the From reference.
 Select the fifth location point on the W-2 wire, closest to the R-01 connector, as
the To reference.
 Click OK.

Figure 5
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Rerouting Wires
Rerouting Wires
The Reroute option enables you to alter the routing path of a wire or cable that is already routed. To
reroute an existing wire or cable, select it, right-click, and select Reroute. The following reroute
options are available:

 Segments – Enables you to specify a different path for the rerouted wire segment to follow. You
do this by first specifying the wire segment you want to reroute, and then by specifying the start
and end location points of existing wires you wish the rerouted wire segment to pass through. If
the segments of multiple wires share the same location points, you can further specify which wire
path you want the rerouted wire to use.In Figure 1, the middle segment of blue wire is being
rerouted, as highlighted in orange in the image on the left. Location points on the purple wire
were specified for the start and end points.

Figure 1 – Rerouting a Wire Segment

 Locations – Enables you to transfer the specified locations of a rerouted wire or cable to a
different, existing wire's path. You must specify the start and end location points of the wire being
rerouted to define the path you want to transfer. This path may contain multiple wire segments
from the wire being rerouted. You then must specify the start and end location points of an
existing wire you wish the rerouted wire path to pass through.In Figure 2, the blue wire is being
rerouted by locations.
Figure 2 – Rerouting a Wire Location

The specified locations to be rerouted are shown in the image on the left, and the corresponding
reroute is shown in the image on the right.
When rerouting cables, by default, all conductors in the cable are to be rerouted. However, you can
restrict which conductors are rerouted by de-selecting the conductors you do not want to reroute.
Similarly, if multiple wires share the same location points, you can restrict which wire's segments are
rerouted. In the figure on the right in Figure 2, by default, the white and green wires were to be
rerouted along with the blue wire, since their segments share the same location points of the blue
segment. However, the segment that was rerouted was restricted to that of the blue wire only.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Reroute_Wires folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Reroute wires in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
10. Select the blue W-2 wire, right-click, and select Reroute.
11. In the graphics window, select the first and third locations on the green and white wire path.

Figure 1
12. Notice that the default routing is the shortest path.

13. Select the Target tab from the Reroute cables dashboard.
 Select W-5 from the Use path of drop-down list.
 Notice that the path is now longer and follows the W-5 wire.

 Select W-3 from the Use path of drop-down list.


Figure 2
14. In the Reroute cables dashboard, click Complete Feature .
15. Select the blue W-2 wire in the mid-segment, right-click, and select Reroute.
16. Notice that only this segment portion of wire W-2, highlighted in cyan, is being rerouted.

Figure 3
17. Select the end locations of the purple-only wire path.

Figure 4
18. Notice that, by default, all wires in the path, not just the blue, are being rerouted.
19. Select the Source tab from the Reroute cables dashboard.
 Clear the W-3 and W-4 check boxes.

 Notice that only the W-2 wire is now being rerouted.

Figure 5
20. In the Source tab, select the W-3 and W-4 check boxes again.

21. In the Reroute cables dashboard, click Complete Feature .

Figure 6
22. Select the blue W-2 wire again, right-click, and select Reroute.
23. Select the Source tab and edit the Path type to Locations.
24. Select the Start and End locations of the path.
Figure 7
25. Select the Target tab from the dashboard.
26. Select the Start and End locations of the black wire path.

Figure 8
27. In the Reroute cables dashboard, click Complete Feature .
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Routing Cables
Routing Cables
You can route cables in an assembly by clicking Route Cables from the Route group to launch
the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 1 – Route Cables Dialog Box

Within the Route cables dialog box, you can then click New Cable to begin routing cables.
The following options are available in the Route cables dialog box:

 Cables/Wires selection area – Along the left side of the dialog box, this area enables you to view
which cables and conductors are being routed.

 Spool – Defines the spool to be used for routing the cable.

 Name – Specifies the name of the cable to be routed.

 From reference – The connector coordinate system from which the cable is routed.

 To reference – The connector coordinate system to which the cable is routed.

 Route Type – Defines the method type used to route the specified cable, including Simple Route
and Follow Cable.

The routing methods for cables are very similar to that of routing wires. By default, the cable jacket
routes the entire length between connectors along with the conductors.
Figure 2 – Routed Cable
You can right-click and select Add Location to add locations to the components of the cable. It is
useful to add these locations to the cable jacket to enable the individual conductors to be visible near
the cable start and endpoints.

Figure 3 – Routing Cable with Inserted Location Points


You can also right-click and select Allow Location, which enables you to select previously established
location points while routing cables.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Cables folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route the first cable in a cabling assembly.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Select Spools from the Logical Data group and click List from the menu manager.
10. Notice the variety of PREFAB spools available.

 Click Close.
11. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
12. In the ribbon, select Route Cables from the Route group.
13. Click New Cable in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select 2X14 from the Spool drop-down list.

 Select CABLE_1, press SHIFT, and select conductor CABLE_1:3.

 In the graphics window, right-click and select From.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

Figure 1
14. In the Route cables dialog box, click Apply.
15. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Thick Cables and notice just the outer cable jacket covering
the individual conductors.

Figure 2
16. With the Route cables dialog box still open, select the cable in the graphics window.

 Verify that only CABLE_1 is selected.

17. In the graphics window, right-click and select From.


18. Right-click and select Add Location.
19. Select the new location.

Figure 3
20. In the Location dashboard, click Complete Feature .
21. In the graphics window, right-click and select To.
22. Right-click and select Add Location.
23. Select the new location.

Figure 4
24. Click Complete Feature .
25. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
Figure 5

26. Click Center Line .


27. In the graphics window, select the cable, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
28. Add the two locations shown.

Figure 6
29. Click Complete Feature .
1. Task 2. Route the second cable in a cabling assembly.
1. In the ribbon, select Route Cables from the Route group.
2. Click New Cable in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select 3X16 from the Spool drop-down list.

 Select CABLE_2, press SHIFT, and select conductor CABLE_2:4.

 In the graphics window, right-click and select From.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.
Figure 7
3. In the Route cables dialog box, select only CABLE_2.

4. In the graphics window, right-click and select From.


 Right-click and select Add Location.
 Select the new location and click Complete Feature .

Figure 8
5. In the graphics window, right-click and select To.
 Right-click and select Allow Location.
 Select the existing location from CABLE_1 .
Figure 9
6. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
7. In the graphics window, select CABLE_2, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
8. Select the existing location point from CABLE_1 and click Complete Feature .

Figure 10

9. Click Csys Display to disable their display.


10. Click Thick Cables .
11. Click Ref Designator Labels to disable their display.
Figure 11
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Routing Ribbon Cables
Routing Ribbon Cables
You can route ribbon cables in an assembly by clicking Route Cables from the Route group to
launch the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 1 – Route Cables Dialog Box

Within the Route cables dialog box, you can then click New Ribbon Cable to begin routing ribbon
cables.
The following options are available in the Route cables dialog box:

 Cables/Wires selection area – Along the left side of the dialog box, this area enables you to view
which ribbon cables and conductors are being routed.

 Spool – Defines the spool to be used for routing the ribbon cable.

 Name – Specifies the name of the ribbon cable to be routed.

 From reference – The connector coordinate system from which the ribbon cable is routed.

 To reference – The connector coordinate system to which the ribbon cable is routed.

 Route Type – Defines the method type used to route the specified cable, including Simple Route
and Follow Cable.

The routing methods for ribbon cables are very similar to that of routing wires. However, when you
insert new location points, you can specify how the ribbon routes through that location point using one
of the following Ribbon types:

 Through – Routes the ribbon cable through the location point, maintaining ribbon orientation.
Figure 2 – Routed Ribbon Cable with Through Ribbon Type

 Bend – Bends the ribbon cable at the location point by the radius you specify.

 Fold – Folds the ribbon cable at the location point as if it were a sheet of paper. This ribbon type
is useful for sharp corners.

Figure 3 – Routed Ribbon Cable with Fold Ribbon Type


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Ribbon folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route a ribbon cable in a cabling assembly.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Select Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Spools from the Logical Data group and click List from the menu manager.
10. Notice the variety of RIBBON spools available.

 Click Close.
11. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
12. Select Route Cables from the Route group.
13. Click New Ribbon Cable in the Route cables dialog box.
 Select RIBBON_15 from the Spool drop-down list.

 Select RIBBON_1, press SHIFT, and select conductor RIBBON_1:15.

 In the graphics window, right-click and select From.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

Figure 1
14. In the Route cables dialog box, click Apply.
15. From the In Graphics toolbar, click Thick Cables .

Figure 2
16. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
17. Click Center Line .
1. Task 2. Insert a location point into the ribbon cable.
1. In the graphics window, select RIBBON_1, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
2. Select the location point.

Figure 3
3. In the Location dashboard, notice that the Ribbon type is specified as Through.
4. In the Location dashboard, click Preview Feature .
Figure 4
5. In the Location dashboard, click Resume Feature .
6. In the Location dashboard, select Bend from the Ribbon type drop-down list.
 Edit the radius to 12.
7. Click Preview Feature .

Figure 5
8. Click Resume Feature .
9. In the dashboard, select Fold from the Ribbon type drop-down list.
10. In the Location dashboard, click Complete Feature .
11. Disable Csys Display .
12. Click Thick Cables .
13. Click Ref Designator Labels to disable their display.

Figure 6
This completes the procedure.
Modifying Wire Routings
Module Overview:
Once a wire or cable is routed, you can delete it or a segment of it. In this module, you learn to modify
a wire or cable's routing properties to control its location and how it displays in the assembly. You also
learn how to edit the order of how the wires enter a connector, as well as the wire length.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Delete wires and segments.

 Edit location properties.

 Modify wire packing, routing dimensions, and wire lengths.

 Utilize information tools.


Concept: Deleting Wires and Segments
Deleting Wires and Segments
You can delete wires, segments of wires, or locations from wires using a variety of methods. The
methods include:

 Delete location points – You can delete location points from wires by clicking Remove

Locations from the Locations group.

Figure 3 – Deleting Location Points

There are two options available:


o ItemFromLocs – Enables you to remove a single item from multiple location points. You can
delete multiple location points from a single cable or wire. If you select multiple location
points, they must all be from the same wire or cable. In Figure 3, the three location points
have been deleted from the red wire.

o ItemsFromLocs – Enables you to remove multiple items from multiple location points. You
can remove location points from multiple wires or cables. You specify from which wire or
wires you want the selected location points deleted.

 Delete portions of wires – You can delete a portion of wire or cable by clicking the Route group
drop-down menu and selecting Delete Cable Portion.
Figure 1 – Cable Portions Deleted from Wires

You can select two location points between which the cable segments are deleted. If more than
one wire shares the location points, you can specify which wires have their portions deleted. In
Figure 1, three wires have had their portions deleted between the location points. This creates a
broken routing. However, you can always route the wire again.
 Delete – Depending on how you delete a wire, you can either delete the entire wire and its
locations, or you can delete only the locations. To delete only the locations, select the wire in the
graphics window and delete it. The locations are deleted, but the wire feature remains in the
model tree as a broken wire. To delete the entire wire, select it in the model tree and delete it.
This also causes locations to be automatically deleted.

Handling Broken Routings


A wire that has had a segment deleted displays in the model tree with a broken icon, as shown in
Figure 2. You can repair a broken wire using either of the following two methods:

Figure 2 – Viewing Broken Wires


 Select the broken wire in the model tree, right-click, and select Route.

 In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click Find . The system
locates all broken wires and enables you to reroute them.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Delete_Wires-Segments folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Delete a wire, a wire segment, and a cable portion.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters.
11. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box from the Display types and
click OK.
12. In the graphics window, select the brown W-7 wire.

Figure 1
13. In the model tree, expand HARNESS_1.PRT.

14. Notice that the actual segment is selected, rather than the wire feature.
Figure 2
15. With the wire still selected, right-click and select Delete, then click OK.
16. In the model tree, notice that the icon for wire W-7 is now broken.

Figure 3
17. In the model tree, right-click wire W-7 and select Route.
18. In the graphics window, right-click and select From.
19. Select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

20. Select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

21. Edit the Route Type to Follow Cable.


22. Select the tan W-5 wire.

23. Select the To and From location points.


Figure 4
24. Click OK.
25. Click in the background to de-select all entities.

26. In the model tree, select the W-7 wire, right-click, and select Delete.
27. Notice that both the wire and segment are to be deleted.

28. Click OK.


29. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Delete Cable Portion.
30. Press CTRL and select the two location points.

Figure 5
31. In the menu manager, select the W-5 and W-6 check boxes, and click Done Sel.
32. Notice the broken W-5 and W-6 wires in the model tree.

Figure 6
33. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group, then click Find . The system finds
both broken wires.
34. Drag over both wires to select them and click Add Item , then click OK.
35. Click Yes in the Disjoint cables message window, then click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
Figure 7
1. Task 2. Delete locations from wires segments in a cabling assembly.
1. In the ribbon, click Remove Locations from the Locations group.
2. Click ItemFromLocs from the menu manager.
3. Zoom in on the red W-1 wire and select its three location points around the arc.

4. Click Done/Return.

Figure 8
5. Click Yes to accept the changes.
6. Click Remove Locations .
7. Click ItemsFromLocs from the menu manager.
8. Select the location point.

9. Select the W-2 and W-3 check boxes and click Done Sel.
10. Click Done/Return.
Figure 9
11. Click Yes to accept the changes.
12. Click Remove Locations .
13. Click ItemsFromLocs from the menu manager.
14. Select the same location point.

15. Click Select All > Done Sel from the menu manager.
16. Click Done/Return and click Yes.

Figure 10
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Editing Location Properties
Editing Location Properties
You can edit the properties of routing locations to control their location, grouping, shape, or angle.
You can edit these properties in the following ways:

 Select a location point, right-click, and select Edit Definition. You can edit the following
properties:

o Drag – Drag the location handle to a different place. All wires passing through that location
handle have their placement updated automatically.

Figure 2 – Dragging a Location Point


o Grouping – Found in the Options tab, you can edit the grouping of wires at the selected
location point to either Round or Flat.
Figure 3 – Editing the Location Point Grouping

o Segment shape – Found in the Options tab, you can edit the segment shape of the wire
between location points. You can specify either Smooth or Straight.

o Angle – Found in the Options tab, you can edit the angle of rotation of the wires through the
location point. This can be used to untangle wires, for example.
Figure 1 – Editing the Location Point Angle

 You can also select a location point, right-click, and select Edit Segment to access any of the
same operations. You can then select the desired location point in the graphics window that you
want to edit.
 Select a location point and click Properties from the Locations group. This enables you to
edit any of the same location point properties found in the Options tab of the dashboard when
editing its definition.Additionally, you can edit the Max Diameter at the location point. The Max
Diameter enables you to enter a value to specify the maximum diameter of cables that can be
routed through the given location point. By default, there is no maximum diameter specified. If
you have defined maximum diameters for location points and want to remove the limitation, you
can select Remove All Diameters from the Diameter types drop-down menu.
If multiple location points are selected, each can have different property values. When a property
has different values for different location points, it is considered undefined. Assigning a value
affects all selected location points by setting them to that value.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Locations_Properties folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Edit the location properties of wires in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Right-click to query and select the first location point below the 9-pin connector.

Figure 1
11. In the ribbon, click Properties from the Locations group.
12. Edit the Grouping to Flat and click OK.
13. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.

Figure 2
14. Query-select the first location point again.

15. Click Properties .


16. Edit the Angle to 180 and press ENTER.
17. Click OK, then click Regenerate .

Figure 3
18. Notice the rotation occurred around the first wire at the location.

19. Query-select the location point again.

20. Right-click and select Edit Definition.


21. Drag the location points slightly to the left.

Figure 4
22. Select the Options tab in the dashboard.
23. Notice these are the same options that were available in the location properties.

24. Click Complete Feature .


25. Press CTRL and select the three center location points on the red wire.
Figure 5
26. Click Properties .
27. Edit the Segment Shape to Straight and click OK.
28. Click Regenerate .

Figure 6
29. Query-select the location point on the hole.
Figure 7
30. Click Properties .
31. Edit the Angle to 180 and press ENTER.
32. Edit the Max Diameter to 10.5 and press ENTER.
33. The system does not allow the value, as it is too small for the current wire bundle.

34. Edit the Max Diameter to 11 and press ENTER.


35. Click OK and notice the diameter dimension.
36. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar and notice that the wire bundle has untwisted.

Figure 8
37. Query-select the location point again.

38. Right-click and select Modify.


39. Double-click the 11 diameter, edit it to 10.5, and press ENTER.
40. Click Regenerate and notice that there is a failure.
41. Click OK to accept the result.
42. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters.
43. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select the Features check box from the Display types and
click OK.
44. Expand HARNESS_1.PRT in the model tree.

45. Delete wire W-11 and click OK.


46. Click Regenerate .
47. Notice that the wire bundles regenerate with one less wire.

Figure 9
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Modifying Wire Packing
Modifying Wire Packing
For location points that have flat wire grouping at either the connector or at routing points, you can
control the arrangement of wires. You can control the following:

 The order in which the wires enter the connector or pass through the location point.

Figure 1 – Default Wire Packing


 The number of rows of wires that enter the connector or pass through the location point.

Figure 2 – Wire Packing Order Modified


Select Packing from the Locations group drop-down menu and then select the flat location you want
to modify.
Figure 3 – Wire Packing with Multiple Rows
You cannot edit the flat wire packing at connectors where multiple coordinate systems were used
to route the wires.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Packing folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Modify the wire packing for a connector in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Select Packing from the Locations group drop-down menu.
11. Select the first location point on the 9-pin connector.

Figure 1
12. Expand the Modify Packing dialog box, as necessary.

 Select the W-8 wire and click Cut.


 Select the W-1 wire and click Paste After.
 Select the W-9 wire and click Cut.
 Select the W-2 wire and click Paste Before.
 Click OK.
13. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.
Figure 2
14. Select Packing and select the first location point again.
15. In the Modify Packing dialog box, select the W-3 wire and click New Row.
 Click OK.
16. Click Regenerate .

Figure 3
17. Select Packing and select the first location point again.
18. In the Modify Packing dialog box, select ----- Row 1 and click Merge Rows.
 Select the W-2 wire and click New Row.
 Select Center as the Justification and click OK.
19. Click Regenerate .
Figure 4
1. Task 2. Copy the wire packing from one location point to other location points.
1. Select Packing and select the first location point on the other 9-pin connector.

Figure 5
2. In the Modify Packing dialog box, click Copy.
3. Select the location point you modified on the other 9-pin connector.

4. Click OK.
5. Click Regenerate .
Figure 6
6. Notice that if you unplugged both connectors and stretched the cable out with the empty connector
portion facing right, they would line up.

7. Query-select the location point.

8. Right-click and select Edit Definition.


9. Select the Options tab from the dashboard.
 Edit the Grouping to Flat.
 Edit the Angle to 180.
10. Click Complete Feature .

Figure 7
11. Select Packing and select the location point that you have just flattened.
12. In the Modify Packing dialog box, click Copy.
 Select a location point on the 9-pin connector above and click OK.
13. Click Regenerate .
Figure 8
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Modifying Routing Dimensions
Modifying Routing Dimensions
There are several operations that create routing dimensions which can be modified. You can edit and
regenerate the dimensions in the same way that you would with any other model dimension. The
following are routing dimension types that can be created:

 Offset – You can select Convert to Offset from the Locations group drop-down menu and select
the location point you want to convert. You then specify a coordinate system from which you
want the offset. This creates dimensions that you can modify between the coordinate system and
location point.

Figure 2 – Offset Dimensions


 Dependent – When you create a Dependent location point, you can drag the handles to the
desired references.

Figure 1 – Dependent Dimensions


This creates dimensions to the references that you can modify.
 Angle – You can modify the angle.

Figure 3 – Angle Dimension


 Use Dir – When you create a location point using the Use Previous Location option, an offset
value is created that you can modify.

 Free Height – You can modify the free height value. If a location point has been changed to a
fixed height by editing it, you can revert the dimension back to the original free height dimension
by selecting Free Height from the Locations group drop-down menu, selecting the location point,
and regenerating.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Dimensions folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Modify wire routing dimensions in HARNESS_2.PRT.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Select Convert to Offset from the Locations group drop-down menu.
11. Select the location point.

Figure 1
12. Click OK.
13. Select coordinate system ENTRY on the 9-pin connector.

14. Query-select the same location point, right-click, and select Modify.
15. Notice the dimensions.

16. Edit the dimensions, as shown.


Figure 2
17. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access toolbar.
18. Select the next location point down on the red W-1 wire.

Figure 3
19. Right-click and select Edit Definition.
20. Select the Placement tab from the dashboard.
21. Edit the reference place location from On to Dependent.
22. Drag the reference handles to the edges.
Figure 4
23. Click Complete Feature .
24. Select the location point, right-click, and select Modify.
25. Edit the middle and right dimensions to 16 and 30, respectively.

Figure 5
26. Notice that the third dimension is the free height, which should not be modified.

27. Click Regenerate .


1. Task 2. Modify wire routing dimensions in HARNESS_1.PRT.
1. Disable Csys Display .
2. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
3. Query-select the location point at the hole center, right-click, and select Modify.
4. Edit the angle value to 180 and click Regenerate .

Figure 6
5. Select the location point, right-click, and select Modify.

Figure 7
6. Edit the value to 22 and click Regenerate .
7. Select the same location point, right-click, and select Edit Definition.
8. Drag the handle to –30.

Figure 8
9. Click Complete Feature .
10. Select the next location point, right-click, and select Modify.
11. Edit the value to 6.
12. Select the location point at the end of the wire.
13. Edit the value to 10.

Figure 9
14. Click Regenerate .
15. Notice that both location points update.

16. Notice, however, that the cable is lifting off the floor.

17. Select Free Height from the Locations group drop-down menu.
18. Select the location point and click OK.

Figure 10
19. Click Regenerate .
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Modifying Wire Lengths
Modifying Wire Lengths
You can directly edit the length of a wire segment. You can also directly edit the length of an entire
wire by selecting its end location points and assigning a fixed length. In Figure 2, the wire was made a
fixed length and it was made longer.

Figure 2 – Wire Lengthened Using Fix Length


If the assembly connectors to which the wire is attached move, the wire bows or stretches,
maintaining its fixed length. However, if the wire must stretch further than its fixed length allows, it
fails. In Figure 3, the wire was stretched to the right by moving a location point, which removed some
of the bowing.

Figure 3 – Location Point of Fixed Length Wire Moved


If the location point were moved slightly more to the right, it would fail.
You can edit the wire length back to a free length.
Figure 1 – Wire Free Length
When this happens, the system automatically determines the required wire length.
The following are wire length options you can use by clicking the Fixed Length types drop-down menu
from the Route group:

 Change Length – Enables you to modify the value of a fixed length wire. This option is not valid
for wires that are set to free length.

 Fix Length – Enables you to specify a length value for a wire segment or an entire wire by
selecting two location points.

 Free Length – Enables you to remove a fixed length dimension from a wire or wire segment.

 Show Length – Enables you to view the existing fixed length value for a wire or wire segment.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Wire_Lengths folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Modify wire lengths in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Select Fix Length from the Fixed Length types drop-down menu in the Route group.
11. Select the cable and two location points.

Figure 1
12. Type 40 as the length and press ENTER.
13. Query-select the location point, right-click, and select Edit Definition.
14. Drag the handle, carefully, and notice the allowed range of length.
Figure 2
15. Click Complete Feature only when the wire is still visible.
16. Select Change Length from the Fixed Length types drop-down menu in the Route group.
17. Select the middle segment.

18. Type 42 as the length and press ENTER.

Figure 3
19. Select Show Length from the Fixed Length types drop-down menu in the Route group.
20. Select the middle segment again.

Figure 4
21. Select Free Length from the Fixed Length types drop-down menu in the Route group.
22. Select the middle segment again and click Yes to remove the dimension.
23. Select the first location point, right-click, and select Edit Definition.
24. Drag the handle and notice there is no longer a length restriction.
Figure 5
25. Click Complete Feature .
26. Select Fix Length from the Fixed Length types drop-down menu.
27. Select the cable and both wire end location points to encompass all segments.

Figure 6
28. Type a whole number value, rounding up slightly from the existing length, and press ENTER.

29. Notice that you can control the wire's overall length.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Utilizing Information Tools
Utilizing Information Tools
There are a variety of tools that can be used to obtain information about routed wires and cables,
including:

 Info – Enables you to view the following types of location information:

o Location Details – Enables you to view all the information for a selected location point.
Information includes which wires pass through the location point and the harness in which
the location point is found.

 Cable Length – Enables you to measure the specified cable length.


 Cabling – Enables you to view various cabling information, including the following:

Figure 2– Viewing Cabling Information

o Harness Items

o Harness Wirelist

o Physical Routing

 Tree columns – You can add additional columns of information to the model tree by
clicking Settings and selecting Tree Columns.
Figure 3 – Viewing Model Tree Columns

The following are useful columns that can be added from the Cable Info type:
o Designation – Enables you to view the various cabling designations of components, wires,
and spools.

o Diameter – Enables you to view the wire diameters of the wires, cables, and spools.

Figure 1 – Viewing Maximum Diameter


o Logical From – Enables you to view the From reference for the imported wiring diagram.

o Logical To – Enables you to view the To reference for the imported wiring diagram.

o Physical From – Enables you to view the From coordinate system reference for the wire or
cable. You can also view the connector name to which the coordinate system belongs.

o Physical To – Enables you to view the To coordinate system reference for the wire or cable.
Again, you can also view the connector name to which the coordinate system belongs.

o Length – Enables you to view the wire and cable lengths.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Information folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Investigate cabling information in HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Click the Info group drop-down menu and select Location Details.
11. Select the location point.

Figure 1
12. In the Information window, notice the four wires that pass through the location.

13. Scroll down and notice the 180 degree dimension and the 12 diameter.

14. Click Close.


15. Select Show Diameter from the Diameter types drop-down menu.
16. Notice that the diameter dimension displays at the location point.
Figure 2
17. Click Repaint from the In Graphics toolbar.
18. In the ribbon, click Cable Length from the Info group.
19. Select the cable and notice its total length is approximately 227 mm.

Figure 3
20. Select the two location points defining the black cable jacket.
Figure 4
21. Notice that the length is approximately 163 mm.

22. In the ribbon, click Cabling from the Info group.


23. In the Cabling Information dialog box, verify that Harness Items is specified and click Apply.
24. Scroll through the Information window, noticing the information for both harnesses.

 Click Close.
25. Select Harness Wirelist from the Cabling Information dialog box and click Apply.
26. Scroll through the Information window, noticing the wiring information for both harnesses.

 Click Close.

Figure 5
27. In the Cabling Information dialog box, select Physical Routing and click Path.
28. Select the yellow wire near the end of either cable end.

Figure 6
29. Notice that the wire name is CABLE_1:2, and it is highlighted in red.

30. Click Close.


1. Task 2. Investigate cabling information in HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done.
2. In the ribbon, click Cabling from the Info group, select Physical Routing, and click Length.
3. Select the single red W-1 wire.

4. Notice that the total length is approximately 95 mm.

5. Select the location point near the end of the spade and the location on the 9-pin connector.

Figure 7
6. Notice that the length is approximately 80 mm.

7. Click Close.
8. At the top of the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns.
9. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, edit the Type to Cable Info.
10. Add the Physical From, Physical To, Length, and Diameter columns to the display and click OK.
11. Click Settings and select Tree Filters.
12. Select the Features check box from the Display types and click OK.
13. Expand HARNESS_1.PRT.

14. Expand the model tree as necessary.

Figure 8
This completes the procedure.
Routing and Utilizing Networks
Module Overview:
Another method to route wires and cables is by using a network. In this module, you learn how to
create a network of location points through which wires must pass as they route to and from specified
connectors. Wires and cables can enter and exit networks at positions nearest their designated
connector. The wire routing through the networks can be controlled by assigning priority to different
location points in the network. You also learn to modify the network on-the-fly when routing wires.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Create networks.

 Check networks for continuity and overlapping.

 Route wires using networks.

 Modify networks while routing.

 Share and connect networks.


Concept: Creating Networks
Creating Networks
A network enables wires being routed to quickly follow predefined paths

Figure 1 – Creating a Network


. When a network is present, the Route cables dialog box defaults to the Via Network Route Type, but
you can still edit it to Simple Route or Follow Cable.
You create a network by specifying network location points.

Figure 2 – Creating a New Network Segment


For example, you can create network location points that are Free, On Axis, and Use Dir. The Use Dir
network location point is created with the Next Location > Use Direction option. Creating a network is
similar to creating location points for wires.
Figure 3 – Viewing Completed Networks
One network is created per harness. However, a network can contain multiple segments which are
not connected. The network can be created in various shapes:

 Open ends – You can create networks that are Y, X, or U-shaped, for example.

 Closed loops – You can create networks that are O-shaped, or shaped like a figure eight, for
example.

 Combination of open ends and closed loops – You can create networks that are Q or P-shaped,
for example.

Shortcut Options
During network creation, right-click to access the following shortcut options:

 Switch Ends – Relocates the active network location point to the opposite end of the current
segment, and enables you to continue routing from the opposite end instead.

 New Segment – Clears the active network location point and enables you to start a new
segment, or start a branch from an existing network location point.

 Edit Segment – Enables you to modify or move network location points. This option is similar to
editing location points for wires.

Network Options
You can access the following network options from the Locations group:

 Fix Tangency – Fixes the tangency between the network and branch.

 Display Tangency – Displays a tangency arrow in the network for all branches.

 Clear Tangency – Clears tangency for the selected network location point.

 Clear All Tangency – Clears tangency for all network branch locations.

 Flip Direction – Flips the direction of the network branch at the selected location(s) and fixes the
tangency direction.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Networks_Creating folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create a routing network in HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, tthen click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree.
11. Right-click layer ROUTING_DTMS and select Unhide.
12. In the ribbon, click Route Network from the Route group.
13. Moving right to left, click three times to create three location points on the main surface.

14. Click datum axis A_2 to create another location point.

Figure 1
15. Click to the left of datum axis A_2 to create another location point.

16. Right-click and select Next Location > Use Direction .


17. Select the top horizontal edge of the main surface.

18. Drag the location to –27.


Figure 2
19. Create another location point to the left of the previous one using the previous direction as shown.

Figure 3
20. Right-click and select Switch Ends.
21. Notice that the active location point is now on the opposite end of the segment.

22. Right-click and select New Segment.


23. Select the existing location point to branch the new segment off.

24. Right-click and select Next Location > On.


25. Moving right to left, click two times to create two new location points on the main surface.

26. Right-click and select Next Location > Use Direction.


27. Create another location point below the previous one using the previous direction as shown. Select
the left vertical edge of the main surface.
Figure 4
28. Right-click and select Next Location > On.
29. Moving right to left, create two more location points. The left-most point should be created using the
previous direction.

30. Click Complete Feature from the Route Network dashboard.

Figure 5
1. Task 2. Create a routing network in HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. In the layer tree, click Show and select Model Tree.
2. Disable Axis Display .
3. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done from
the menu manager.
4. Click Route Network from the Route group.
5. Click ten times to create ten network location points on the main surface.
Figure 6
6. Right-click and select New Segment.
7. Moving top to bottom, select the two existing network location points to create the small segment.

Figure 7
8. Right-click and select New Segment.
9. Moving right to left, the new segment is comprised of four location points. The two end location points
should consist of existing location points.

10. Click Complete Feature .


Figure 8
11. Click Modify Harness and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu manager.
12. Right-click to query and select the top network segment.

13. Right-click and select Edit Segment.


14. Select the left-most location point and drag the offset to –30.
15. Select any other location points and move their locations as necessary.

16. Click Complete Feature .

Figure 9
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Checking Networks
Checking Networks
You can check networks for both continuity and overlapping locations.

 A continuity check locates the number of unconnected network segments and highlights each in
a different color.

Figure 1 – Viewing Unconnected Network Segments


Colors include pink, black, blue, green, orange, and so on. You may intend to have different,
unconnected segments, or you may not.
 The overlapping locations check locates network locations that are close, but not actually
touching.

Figure 2 – Viewing Overlapping Network Location Points


The system enables you to join overlapping segments.
Figure 3 – Close Up of Overlapping Segments
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Networks_Checking folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Check the network in HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
6. Observe that there seem to be three network sections in the network routings.

Figure 1
7. In the model tree, cursor over HARNESS_1.PRT and HARNESS_2.PRT.

8. Notice that the upper network sections are part of HARNESS_1.PRT and the lower network section is
part of HARNESS_2.PRT.

Figure 2
9. In the ribbon, click Check Continuity from the Info group.
10. Notice that the HARNESS_1.PRT network is actually four segments.

Figure 3
11. Click OK in the Message dialog box.
12. In the ribbon, click Route Network from the Route group and select the two existing network
location points to close the large gap.

Figure 4
13. Click Complete Feature .
14. Click Check Continuity and notice that the HARNESS_1.PRT network is now three segments.
Figure 5
15. Click OK.
16. Zoom in closely to either endpoint of the previous, blue-highlighted segment.

17. Notice that the segments are not connected. The location points “overlap.”

Figure 6
18. Zoom out.

19. In the ribbon, click Check Locations from the Info group.
20. Notice the four overlapping locations found (two on each end of the previously highlighted blue
segment).
Figure 7
21. Click Confirm to merge them into single locations.
22. Click Check Continuity and notice that the HARNESS_1.PRT network is now continuous.

Figure 8
23. Click OK.
1. Task 2. Check the network in HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done.
2. In the ribbon, click Check Continuity from the Info group.
3. Notice that the HARNESS_2.PRT network is actually two segments.

Figure 9
4. Click OK in the Message dialog box.
 The fact that there are two segments indicates a potential issue at either end of the black
segment.

5. Zoom in closely to the location to the right of the gold spade connector.

6. Right-click to query and select one of the location points.

7. Right-click and select Edit Definition.


8. Select the other existing location point to close it.
Figure 10
9. Click Complete Feature .
10. Click Check Continuity and notice that the HARNESS_2.PRT network is now continuous.

Figure 11
11. Click OK.
12. Click Check Locations and notice there are no overlapping locations found.
 Remember that you detected a potential issue on either end of the previously highlighted black
segment.
13. Zoom in closely to the “peak” location just below the M-01 connector.

14. Notice the gap.

Figure 12
15. The gap was not detected because open loop networks such as the HARNESS_1.PRT network are
allowed.

16. Right-click to query and select one of the location points.

17. Right-click and select Edit Definition.


18. Select the other existing location point to close it.

Figure 13
19. Click Complete Feature .
o You could have initially used the Check Continuity function on HARNESS_2.PRT. It would
have located and closed both gaps automatically.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Routing using Networks
Routing using Networks
A network enables you to route wires to quickly follow predefined paths. When a network is present,
the Route cables dialog box defaults to the Via Network Route Type, but you can still edit it to Simple
Route or Follow Cable.

Figure 1 – Routing Wire Via Network

Consider the following when routing wires via a network:

 The system defaults to the shortest path when given multiple path options.

 Wires routed through a network can only enter or exit the network path at a location point.

 You can set priorities for individual network location points, but not the path. Priority options
include:

o Primary – The default location priority type. These network locations are used whenever
possible.
Figure 2 – Modified Location Point Priority

o Required – Forces all wires being routed via a network to pass through the specified
location(s) in the same direction, even if this does not create the shortest path for each
wire. This priority could be used to direct wires through a common splice or to ensure that
wires travel through a specific clamp, hole, or duct.

Figure 3 – Further Modifications to Location Point Priority

o Secondary – A network location point that is routed through only if a complete path using
primary locations is unavailable.

o Disallowed – Disallowed network locations are not to be used for routing via a network. You
can use this option to avoid overfilling of channels, interference with a fixed hole size in a
bulkhead, or creation of loops in an individual harness.
Modifying the location priority only affects subsequent routing. Previously routed wires are not
affected. You use the Reroute option to edit existing routing paths.

Other priority options include:

 Priority > Reset All Priority – Resets the priority of all network location points back to the Primary
default.

 Priority > Required Priority – Enables you to specify either of the following location point priority
requirements:

o Optimize – Optimizes the shortest path with at least one location for all cables routed via
the network.

o Put On Wire – Locates the shortest paths with a common location on the selected wire.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Networks_Routing folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route wires in HARNESS_1.PRT and HARNESS_2.PRT.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
11. In the Route cables dialog box, click New Wire two times.
 Edit the W-2 wire to 14_ORANGE from the Spool drop-down list.

 Press CTRL and select both wires.

 Click in the From collector to activate it.


 Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-01 connector.

Figure 1
12. With the To collector still active, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.
Figure 2
13. Notice that the wires follow the network to the selected destination.

14. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.


15. Click Modify Harness and click HARNESS_2 > Done.
16. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-1 wire to 14_RED from the Spool drop-down list.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

17. Notice that the wire follows the upper network path.

Figure 3
18. Click OK.
1. Task 2. Experiment with network location priorities.
1. Right-click to query and select the network location point.

2. In the ribbon, click Properties from the Locations group.


Figure 4
3. Select Required from the Priority drop-down list.
 Click OK.
4. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 For the W-2 wire, select 16_BLUE from the Spool drop-down list.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

5. Notice that the wire now follows the upper segment of the lower network path.

Figure 5
6. Click Cancel and click Yes.
7. Right-click to query and select the network location point.

8. Click Properties .
Figure 6
9. Select Disallowed from the Priority drop-down list.
 Click OK.
10. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-2 wire Spool to 16_BLUE.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

11. Notice that the wire now follows the lower segment of the lower network path.

Figure 7
12. Click OK.
13. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the S-01 connector.

14. Notice that the wire is not routed.


Figure 8
15. Click Cancel and click Yes.
16. Select Reset All Priority from the Priority types drop-down menu in the Locations group.
17. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the S-01 connector.

18. Notice that the wire is now routed.

Figure 9
19. Click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Modifying Networks While Routing
Modifying Networks While Routing
When routing wires via a network, the system can only route wires along tangent, continuous network
portions. For this reason, it is often useful to create network segments on-the-fly while routing wires.
This technique enables you to create network paths that may not have been in the original network. In
Figure 1, the wire is to be routed between the two connectors.

Figure 1 – Wire Routing that Cannot Route Via Network


However, there is not an existing network path that enables the wire to be routed. Consequently, a
tangent network segment is created on-the-fly, as shown in Figure 2, enabling the wire to route as
desired.

Figure 2 – Inserting a Tangent Network Segment


In theory, you could create the entire network on-the-fly as needed for the different wires you
route.
Figure 3 – Routed Wire
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Networks_Modifying folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create network segments on the fly while routing wires.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
11. In the Route cables dialog box, click New Wire .
 Edit the W-1 wire to 16_RED from the Spool drop-down list.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

Figure 1
12. Notice that the wire does not route because there is no tangent network path.

13. In the Route cables dialog box, select Simple Route from the Route Type drop-down list and leave
the dialog box open.
Figure 2

14. In the ribbon, click Route Network from the Route group and select the existing network location
points to create the tangent segment.

Figure 3
15. Click Complete Feature .
16. In the Route cables dialog box, select Via Network from the Route Type drop-down list.
17. Notice that the wire now routes along the tangent network path.
Figure 4
18. Click OK.
19. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-2 wire Spool to 16_BLUE.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the C-02 connector.

Figure 5
20. Notice that the wire routes along the previously established network path.

21. Disable Csys Display .


22. Click Route Network and select the existing network location point, a new location on the
surface, and another existing location to create a new network segment.
Figure 6
23. Click Complete Feature .
24. Notice that the new wire now routes along the new path instead because it is shorter.

Figure 7
25. Click OK.
1. Task 2. Change the path of a wire routed along a network.
1. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Delete Cable Portion.
2. Press CTRL and select the two network location points.

Figure 8
3. Select wire W-1 from the menu manager and click Done Sel.
4. Click Route Cables from the Route group and select one of the red W-1 wire stubs.
5. Notice that the cable routes along the new, shorter network.

Figure 9
6. Click OK.
o You could also select the Reroute option, or delete the segment and route the W-1 wire again.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Sharing and Connecting Networks
Sharing Networks
Sharing makes a network created in a non-active harness available to the active harness.

Figure 1 – Sharing a Network


For example, you can share the Harness_1 network while working in Harness_2. Use the following
steps to share networks:
1. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network > Share.

2. Select the harness associated with the network you want to share with the current harness.

3. When you select the harness, the model is regenerated and the locations in the shared network
are available to the current harness.

To undo the sharing, you can click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network >
Unshare and select the network you want to unshare.

Connecting Networks
Once a network is shared, you can connect two networks together. For example, you can create a
network segment bridging the gap between the Harness_1 network and the Harness_2 network, as
shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 – Connecting Networks
Use the following steps to connect networks:
1. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network > Share.

2. Select a location in the currently active network.

3. Select a location in the shared network.

4. A segment is created. You can then add location points to this segment if necessary.

You can create multiple connecting segments between networks, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 3 – Routing a Wire
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Networks_Share-Connect folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Connect and share networks between harnesses to route wires.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Notice that the black wire W-1 is already created.

Figure 1

11. Click Center Line from the In Graphics toolbar.


12. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-2 wire to 16_RED from the Spool drop-down list.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

13. Notice that the wire tries to follow the network from HARNESS_2.PRT.
Figure 2
14. Click Cancel and click Yes.
15. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network > Share.
16. Select anywhere on the network in HARNESS_1.PRT.

17. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .


 Edit the W-2 wire Spool to 16_RED.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

18. Notice that the wire now follows the network shared from HARNESS_1.PRT.

Figure 3
19. Click OK.
20. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-3 wire Spool to 16_GREEN.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.
 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

21. Notice that the wire does not route because even though the network is shared, there is no physical
connection between networks.

22. Select Simple Route from the Route Type drop-down list.

Figure 4
23. Click Cancel and click Yes.
24. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network > Connect.
25. Select the location on HARNESS_2.PRT and the location on HARNESS_1.PRT.

Figure 5
26. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Share Network > Connect.
27. Select the location on HARNESS_2.PRT and the location on HARNESS_1.PRT.
Figure 6

28. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .


 Edit the W-3 wire Spool to 16_GREEN.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the M-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.

Figure 7
29. Click OK.
30. Click Route Cables and click New Wire .
 Edit the W-4 wire Spool to 16_WHITE.

 For the From collector, select coordinate system ENTRY on the R-01 connector.

 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.
Figure 8
31. Click OK.
32. Enable Thick Cables .
33. Disable Ref Designator Labels .
34. Disable Csys Display .

Figure 9
This completes the procedure.
Establishing Logical References
Module Overview:
Creo Schematics is a separate software product from Creo Parametric that enables you to create 2-D
routed systems diagrams, including block, circuit, and wiring diagrams. These diagrams can be used
to pass design information into the Creo Parametric 3-D harness design. This design information is
used to help automatically designate the assembly connectors and specify entry port information.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Have an overview on logical referencing.

 Investigate Creo Schematics diagrams.

 Export data from Creo Schematics.

 Import Creo Schematics data into Creo Parametric.

 Autodesignate components.

 View designation information.


Concept: Logical References Overview
Logical References Overview
Logical Referencing is the action of linking Creo Parametric with routing information from an electrical
or mechanical diagram tool.

Figure 1 – Creo Schematics Diagram


The routing information is text (parameter) based, and not graphical in nature. Once the routing
information is known to Creo Parametric, you can automatically designate components and route
wires.

Figure 2 – Viewing Designated Components


If the diagram information changes, these changes can then be propagated into Creo Parametric.

Figure 3 – Viewing Routed Wires

Logical Referencing provides Creo Parametric with the following information:

 Information on all connectors, including model name and reference designator name.
 The wire list, both quantity as well as the names of all wires and cables.

 The From and To routing information.

 Spool information.

 A means to compare the desired result (logical data) with the 3-D model in Creo Parametric.
Concept: Investigating Creo Schematics
Diagrams
Investigating Creo Schematics Diagrams
Creo Schematics is a separate software product from Creo Parametric. Creo Schematics can be used
to design 2-D wiring and other types of diagrams.

Figure 1 – Creo Schematics Wiring Diagram


Logical information can then be passed from Creo Schematics into Creo Parametric.

Figure 2 – Selecting a Fiber


Navigation using Keyboard and Mouse Combinations
To view the diagram, you can pan and zoom using a combination of keyboard and mouse functions.
For each navigation, you press and hold a key and click the appropriate mouse button, as shown in
the following table. These navigation controls are the same as those of Creo Parametric.

Orient Keyboard and Mouse Selection


ation
Pan
Orient Keyboard and Mouse Selection
ation
Zoom

Scroll
Zoom

There are also several In Graphics toolbar icons equivalent to Creo Parametric, including Refresh
, Zoom In , Zoom Out , and Full Sheet .
Creo Schematics Objects and Terminology
The following are Creo Schematics objects and terminology:

 Ports – Wire and cable connection locations. Ports display in purple in these training class
diagrams.

 Blocks – Represent connectors and components. Blocks display in blue in these training class
diagrams. Blocks also contain ports.

 Groups – Represent more complex components. Groups contain multiple blocks or fibers.
Groups display in gray in these class training diagrams.

 Fibers – Connection objects including wires and cables.

Fibers are also used to represent Pipelines.


 Labels – Text objects on ports, blocks, fibers, and so on.

 Properties – All of the above objects contain variables called properties. These properties are
equivalent to parameters in Creo Parametric.
 Datasets – A predefined set of properties that can be applied to an object to quickly configure a
number of properties.

Design Hierarchy
To properly make use of logical information, the design hierarchy between Creo Schematics and Creo
Parametric must match. For example, if the 3-D wiring model contains only connector part models,
then only blocks are required in Creo Schematics. However, if the 3-D wiring model is to include
subassemblies containing connectors, this design hierarchy must be duplicated in Creo Schematics.
This is accomplished by using Group objects in Creo Schematics that contain one or more blocks. For
example, in a 3-D model, you may have a relay assembly containing component parts for the coils
and contacts. In order to maintain the same hierarchy, you would create the coils and contacts as
blocks in Creo Schematics and place those blocks in a group. The group would then be instanced on
the diagram to represent the relay.

Example Component Creo Schematics Creo Parametric


Object Object
Relay Group Subassembly

Relay Coil Block Component Part

Relay Contact Block Component Part

Selection
You can select objects in the diagram by clicking them.

Figure 3 – Viewing Fiber Properties


You can also drag a window around a number of objects to select them all. Unlike Creo Parametric,
Creo Schematics always selects the closest object to the cursor. Therefore, the concept “select the
background to de-select” does not apply in Creo Schematics. Rather, you must right-click and select
Deselect All. Also, when a given object is selected, you can right-click and select from numerous
options related to that object.
Similar to Creo Parametric, you can edit the selection filter to aid in selection of a specific type of
object. For general selection, use Component Selection Tool . Other selection filters
include Block Selection Tool , Fiber Selection Tool , Port Selection Tool , Label
Selection Tool , Component Group Selection Tool , and Geometry Selection Tool .
Licensing
Creo Schematics has two licensed versions:
 Creo Schematics Lite – This licensing comes with the Creo Parametric Piping and Cabling
modules. All Creo Parametric training diagrams are created in Creo Schematics Lite.

 Creo Schematics Advanced Schematic – This licensing is available as an option.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts it is recommended you save your work. Click File > Save, then
click File > Close Design.

1. Task 1. Navigate the Creo Schematics diagram.


1. If necessary, start Creo Schematics.

2. Click File > Open Design.


3. In the Open Design dialog box, browse to ..\PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling, if necessary.
4. Double-click the Schematics_Investigating folder.
5. Select the WIRING design and click Open.

Figure 1
6. Middle-click and drag to pan the diagram and center the wiring diagram in the window.

Figure 2
7. Press CTRL and middle-click and drag to zoom in on harness_1.
Figure 3
8. Pan and zoom the diagram as necessary to view the C-01 connector.

Figure 4
1. Task 2. Select various items in the diagram.
1. Select the C-01 connector block by clicking the blue border.

2. Right-click and select Deselect All.


3. Select the C-01 connector label by clicking the black text.

4. Right-click and select Deselect All.


5. Select the W-2 fiber by clicking the black line near the W-2 label.
Figure 5
1. Task 3. Investigate various properties of the diagram.
1. Select the W-1 fiber by clicking the black line near the W-1 label.

2. Right-click and select Properties.


3. In the Fiber Properties dialog box, notice the following:

 The color is red.

 The full_name is W-1.

 The min_bend_radius is 0.025.

 The spool_name is 14_red_sxl.

 The thickness is 3.94.

Figure 6
4. These values are passed to Creo Parametric to assign color appearance, name, minimum bend
radius, spool, and physical thickness.

5. Click OK.
6. Select the C-01 block by clicking the blue border.

7. Right-click and select Properties.


8. In the Block Properties dialog box, notice the following:

 The def_internal_len is 3.

 The full_name is C-01.

 The model_name is conn_2pin-sq.


Figure 7
9. These values are passed to Creo Parametric to assign a default internal length for this connector, the
reference designator name, and the corresponding Creo Parametric name, whether *.prt or *.asm.

10. Click OK.


11. Set the selection filter to Port Selection Tool from the Status toolbar.
12. Select Port 1 on the C-01 connector by clicking the purple text.
13. Right-click and select Properties.
14. In the Port Properties dialog box, notice the following:

 The entry_port is entry_1.

Figure 8
15. This value is used by Creo Parametric to match the name of the coordinate system port on the
connector.

16. Click OK.


17. Pan to the M-01 connector.
Figure 9
18. Select Port 1, right-click, and select Properties.
19. With the Port Properties dialog box still open, select ports 2 through 8 in the diagram and notice the
changing entry_port values.

 Ports 1–4 are mapped to entry_port entry_1 through entry_4, respectively.

 These wires route separately to separate entry port coordinate systems.

 Ports 5–8 are mapped to the same entry_port entry.

 Notice that these ports also make use of a def_grouping FLAT property to set this option in Creo
Parametric for wire routing.

 These wires route to the same entry_port coordinate system and are arranged in a FLAT
grouping.

 Click OK.
20. Set the selection filter back to Component Selection Tool from the Status toolbar.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Exporting Data from Creo Schematics
Exporting Data from Creo Schematics
Creo Schematics exports schematic design information using XML files. Creo Parametric can then
import the XML file data to enable logical referencing.

Figure 1 – Wiring Diagram to be Exported


You can configure the exported XML file using the following options available in the Export to XML
dialog box:

 XML Export File — Enables you to specify the name of the XML file to be exported from Creo
Schematics.

Figure 2 – Export to XML Dialog Box

You can browse to the desired output folder location by clicking File Selector.
Figure 3 – Specifying the Export Location

 Target application — Enables you to specify the application for which the output is used. Options
include:

o General

o Pro/PIPING

o Pro/CABLING — There is also an option for cabling versions before Pro/ENGINEER


Wildfire 3.0.

 What to export — Enables you to specify what content to export from Creo Schematics. Options
include:

o Whole design

o Current sheet

o Selection

o Report results

 Validate export — Enables you to perform different validation options on the XML when the data
is exported. Options include:

o Duplicate Ref Des — Enables you to check for duplicate reference designators.

o Ignore warnings

o Validate XML
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts it is recommended you save your work. Click File > Save, then
click File > Close Design.
2. Click File > Open and navigate to the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Schematics_Export.
Double-click WIRING.

1. Task 1. Export data from Creo Schematics.


1. Click File > Export > XML from the Creo Schematics Lite main menu.
2. In the Export to XML dialog box, click File Selector.
3. In the Select export filename dialog box, browse to ..\Cabling\Schematics_Export.
 Type wiring.xml as the File Name.
 Click Open.

Figure 1
4. In the Export to XML dialog box, select Pro/CABLING as the Target application.
 Clear the Pre Wildfire 3.0 check box.
 Select the Current sheet option.
 If necessary, select the Duplicate Ref Des check box.
 Click OK.

Figure 2
5. In the message window, notice the message that states the Export to XML is complete.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Importing Creo Schematics Data Into
Creo Parametric
Importing Creo Schematics Data Into Creo Parametric
Importing Creo Schematics data into Creo Parametric gives the system access to logical information
exported from Creo Schematics in the form of an XML file.

Figure 1 – Viewing Imported Wire Information


Access to logical information automates wire and cable creation and routing, as the system then has
the following information:

Figure 2 – Viewing Imported Cable Information

 Wire and Cable list.

 From and To routing information — Specifies which connector and port are to be used for each
wire and cable.

 Connector list — Includes both model names and reference designators.

 Spools — Includes spools for both wires and cables.


Figure 3 – Viewing Imported Spool Information

You can reference and manage logical information from Creo Parametric’s Logical Data group.
Options in the Logical Data menu include the following:

 Import — Enables you to import logical data from an ASCII wire list file. The following types of
files can be imported:

o RS Designer — Enables you to import an *.xml file.

o PTC Neutral — Enables you to import an *.nwf file.

o Mentor Graph

 Export — Enables you to export logical data to an ASCII file.

 Ref Diagram — Enables you to reference a Pro/DIAGRAM.

Pro/DIAGRAM is an older Pro/ENGINEER module that enables you to create wiring


diagrams similar to Creo Schematics, except within the Pro/ENGINEER interface.
Pro/DIAGRAM is similar to Drawing mode. Pro/Diagrams are created with a *.dgm extension,
and you simply reference the diagram itself, not an exported file.

 Clear Reference — Clears all logical information from current model.

 Compare — Creates a text window comparing imported logical data with the 3-D model data.
You can also click Compare from the Logical Data group.
 Update — Updates previous logical data with new logical data. You can also
click Update from the Logical Data group.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Schematics_Import folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Import Creo Schematics data into Creo Parametric.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. In the ribbon, click Import from the Logical Data group.


6. Click RS Designer > Whole XML from the menu manager.
7. In the File Open dialog box, double-click WIRING.xml.
8. In the message window, notice the message that states the XML file has been read successfully.

Figure 1

9. In the ribbon, click Compare from the Logical Data group.


10. In the menu manager, select the Alphabetical check box and click Execute.
11. In the Information Window, notice the XML wiring reference data for the wires, filled out from Creo
Schematics.

Figure 2
12. In the Information Window, notice the XML reference data for the cables, filled out from Creo
Schematics.

Figure 3
13. In the Information Window, notice the XML reference data for the connectors, filled out from Creo
Schematics.
Figure 4
14. In the Information Window, notice the XML reference data for the spools, filled out from Creo
Schematics.

Figure 5
15. Click Close from the Information Window.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Autodesignating Components
Autodesignating Components
With logical data in place, the system can automatically locate assembly components with a matching
“model name.” With auto designation, the reference designation and entry port information are
conveyed automatically.

Figure 1 – Viewing Designated Components


If more than one of the same type of connector is found in the assembly, the system enables you to
identify each one by selecting the model. This is known as manual designation. Any models that are
manually designated display in the Auto Designator dialog box with a status of Manual Match.

Figure 2 – Viewing Designated Components


The Auto Designator enables you to further designate and undesignate components.

The Auto Designator dialog box also enables you to access the Electrical Parameters for each
connector and port. For example, you can see the defined values and reference designators.
Figure 3 – Viewing Electrical Parameters
You can view this same dialog box by clicking Cabling Parameters from the Components
group.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Designate_Auto folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Autodesignate components in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. In the ribbon, click Auto Designate from the Logical Data group.
6. In the Auto Designator dialog box, select C-01, and notice that its status is Multiple.
7. Select the upper connector.

Figure 1
8. In the Auto Designator dialog box, select M-01, and notice that its status is Multiple.
9. Select the upper connector.

Figure 2
10. In the Auto Designator dialog box, click Apply and notice that the system automatically matches the
remaining cabling components.
 Click OK.
11. Enable Ref Designator Labels .
12. Click Cabling Parameters from the Components group.
13. Press CTRL and select M-01 and M-02.

14. Click OK from the Select dialog box.


15. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, notice that the REF_DES and MODEL_NAME parameters
automatically fill out from the Creo Schematics logical information.

Figure 3
16. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, select the Entry Ports option.
 Expand the connector nodes and the respective Entry Ports nodes.
 Notice the names and quantity of the defined entry ports on each connector, as well as the port
type and internal length.

Figure 4
 All this data came from the imported Creo Schematics data.

17. Click Cancel.


This completes the procedure.
Concept: Viewing Designation Information
Viewing Designation Information
You can view reference designators in the assembly using either of the following methods:

 Click Ref Designator Labels in the In Graphics display toolbar to toggle their display on and
off. After editing the selection filter to Annotation, you can select a reference designator, right-
click, and select Move to move it.

Figure 1 – Moving Reference Designators


 Within the model tree it is possible to add information useful to cabling for easy reference. You
can click Settings and select Tree Columns to add the Designation column from the Cable
Info Type.

Figure 3 – Viewing Reference Designators in the Model Tree


Updating and Comparing Reference Designator Information
You can update and compare the logical data in a cabling assembly.

 Update — Updates previous logical data with new logical data.


 Compare — Displays a text window comparing imported logical data with the 3-D model
data.
Figure 2 – Comparing Reference Designator Information
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Designate_Viewing folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. View designation information in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. Edit the selection filter to Annotation.


6. Select the M-01 annotation, right-click, and select Move.
7. Move the annotation.

8. Select the M-02 annotation, right-click, and select Move.


9. Move the annotation.

Figure 1

10. In the ribbon, click Compare from the Logical Data group.
11. Select the Alphabetical check box if necessary, and click Execute.
12. In the Information Window, scroll down to the connector/component section, and notice that the
connectors are now matched.

 Click Close.
Figure 2
13. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns.
14. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Cable Info from the Type drop-down list.
 Select Designation and click Add Column .
 Click OK.

Figure 3
This completes the procedure.
Routing Wires and Cables using Logical Data
Module Overview:
In addition to connector designation and entry port information, the imported logical data also contains
wire lists, as well as the from and to routing information for each of the wires. This logical data can be
used to route wires and cables, and you can compare the routing progress with the logical data. If the
design is modified or updated in the electrical diagram tool, the updated logical information can be
imported into Creo Parametric and you can quickly update the routings.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Route with logical data.

 Route with logical data and networks.

 View routing information.

 Update Creo Schematics designs.

 Update Creo Parametric with new Creo Schematics data.


Concept: Routing with Logical Data
Routing with Logical Data
Routing wires and cables with logical data available is similar to routing wires manually. However,
routing with logical data has the following benefits:

 Information on all connectors, including model name and reference designation name is known.

 The wire list, including quantity and all names of wires and cables, is known.

 The From and To routing information is known.

 Spools are created automatically as wires and cables using those spools are routed.

 The system can compare your routing progress in Creo Parametric with the logical data.

Once the wires are routed between their destinations using Simple Route, you can use this method to
insert any intermediate locations to shape the routing path. In Figure 1, the wires are routed using the
logical data, but they interfere with the solenoid component.

Figure 1 – Routing with Logical Data


In Figure 2 a location point is inserted to route the wires around the solenoid, as shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 – Inserting a Location Point
You can also route using the Follow Cable route type for subsequent wires to provide a routing path.

Figure 3 – Viewing the Finished Routing


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Logical folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route wires and cables with logical data only.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Click Route Cables from the Route group.
11. Click Find in the Route cables dialog box.
 Click wire W-1 and drag to select through wire W-4, then click Add and click OK.

Figure 1
12. Notice the wire preview and click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
13. In the model tree, click Show and select Layer Tree.
14. Right-click layer ROUTING_DTMS and select Unhide.
15. In the graphics window, select the red W-1 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
16. Select datum axis A_2.

17. Click Complete Feature from the Location dashboard.


18. Disable Axis Display .
19. In the graphics window, select the black W-2 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
20. Select the location point you just created.

21. Click Complete Feature .


Figure 2

22. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness and click HARNESS_2 > Done from the menu manager.
23. Click Route Cables and click Find .
 Select cable CAB_1 and click Add , then click OK.
24. Notice that the cable needs its From and To references defined.

Figure 3
25. In the graphics window, right-click and select From.
 Right-click and select Add Location.
 Click the main surface near the R-01 connector.

Figure 4
26. Click Complete Feature .
27. For the To reference, right-click in the graphics window and select Add Location.
 Click the main surface near the M-01 connector.

28. Click Complete Feature .

Figure 5
29. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
30. Click Route Cables and click Find .
 Click wire W-5 and drag to select through wire W-8, then click Add and click OK.

Figure 6
31. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
32. In the graphics window, select the red W-8 wire, right-click, and select Insert Locations.
33. Click the main surface.
Figure 7
34. Click Complete Feature .
35. Click Thick Cables from the In Graphics toolbar.

Figure 8
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Routing with Logical Data and Networks
Routing with Logical Data and Networks
Routing wires and cables with logical data available is similar to routing wires manually.

Figure 2 – Routing with Logical Data and Network


However, routing with logical data and networks has the following benefits:
 The system defaults to routing along the network available in that harness.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Network

If the harness is shared or connected, the system can utilize additional networks when routing.
 The wire list, including quantity and all names of wires and cables, is known.
 The From and To routing information is known.

Figure 3 – Viewing Finished Cable Routings

 Spools are created automatically as wires and cables using those spools are routed.

 The system can compare your routing progress in Creo Parametric with the logical data.

Using this method, the system defaults to using the Via Network route type. You can also perform the
following optional operations:

 Toggle back to the Simple Route route type. Once the wires are routed between their
destinations, you can insert any intermediate locations to shape the routing path as desired.

 You can also route using the Follow Cable route type for subsequent wires to provide a special
routing path not belonging to a network.

 Create network segments on-the-fly as desired while routing.

 Share and connect to other available networks as desired.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_Logical_Network folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Route wires and cables using both logical data and networks.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
11. Click Find in the Route cables dialog box.
 Click wire W-1 and drag to select through wire W-4, then click Add and click OK.
12. Notice the wire preview and click OK in the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 1

13. Click Modify Harness and click HARNESS_2 > Done from the menu manager.
14. Click Route Cables , then click Find .
 Select cable CAB_1 and click Add , then click OK.
15. Notice the wire preview and click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
Figure 2
16. Right-click to query and select the network location point.

17. In the ribbon, click Properties from the Locations group.

Figure 3
18. In the Location properties dialog box, select Required from the Priority drop-down list.
 Click OK.
19. Click Route Cables , then click Find .
 Click wire W-5 and drag to select through wire W-8, then click Add and click OK.
20. Notice the wire preview and click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
Figure 4
21. Enable Thick Cables .

Figure 5
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Viewing Routing Information
Viewing Routing Information
You can add information useful to cabling to the model tree for easy reference. You can
click Settings and select Tree Columns to add the following columns from the Cable Info Type:

Figure 2 – Viewing Routing Information in the Model Tree

 Designation — Displays wire and connector reference designator.

 Diameter — Displays the diameter of the wire or cable.

 Logical From — Displays the wire or cable's starting reference designator and port number.

 Logical To — Displays the wire or cable's ending reference designator and port number.

 Physical From — Displays the assembly component reference designator and coordinate system
referenced at the start of the wire or cable.

 Physical To — Displays the assembly component reference designator and coordinate system
referenced at the end of the wire or cable.

 Length — Displays the wire or cable length in the assembly.

A wire that has had a segment deleted displays in the model tree with an incomplete, or “broken” icon.

Figure 1 – Viewing Complete and Incomplete Wire Routings


You can repair that broken wire using either of the following two methods:
 Select the broken wire in the model tree, right-click, and select Route.

 In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click Find. The system finds all
broken wires and enables you to reroute them.
Updating and Comparing Reference Designator Information
You can update and compare the logical data in a cabling assembly.

 Update — Updates previous logical data with new logical data.


 Compare — Displays a text window comparing imported logical data with the 3-D model
data.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Route_View-Info folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. View the routing information for wires in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. In the ribbon, click Compare from the Logical Data group.


6. Select the Alphabetical check box, if necessary, and click Execute.
7. In the Information Window, scroll down to the wires and cables sections, and notice that they are now
matched.

 Click Close.

Figure 1
8. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Columns.
9. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select Cable Info from the Type drop-down list.
 Select Designation and click Add Column .
 Click Add Column six more times to add the remaining columns.
 Click OK.
10. In the model tree, click Settings and select Tree Filters.
11. In the Model Tree Items dialog box, select Features from the display type and click OK.
12. Expand the Harness_1 node to view the columns.

13. Click and drag the sash to widen the model tree and view the columns.
Figure 2
14. Click and drag the sash to narrow the model tree.

15. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
16. Enable Center Line .
17. Click the Route group drop-down menu and select Delete Cable Portion.
18. Press CTRL and select the two locations.

19. In the menu manager, select both the W-3 and W-4 check boxes.

 Click Done Sel.

Figure 3
20. Notice that the model tree wire icons indicate wires W-3 and W-4 are incomplete.

Figure 4

21. Click Route Cables from the Route group.


22. Click Find in the Route cables dialog box.
 Click wire W-3 and drag to also select wire W-4, then click Add and click OK.
 Click Yes to join the disjointed cables.
23. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
24. Notice that the model tree wire icons indicate that wires W-3 and W-4 are now complete.
Figure 5
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Updating Creo Schematics Designs
Updating Creo Schematics Designs
If edits are made to a Creo Schematics wiring diagram, those edits can be propagated to the Creo
Parametric model by exporting a new XML file. Typical changes that could be made include:

 Rerouting wires to different ports.

Figure 1 – Moving the Fiber to a Different Port


 Changing spools. For example, you may wish to change the wire's gauge or color.

 Adding or deleting wires or cables.

 Adding or deleting connectors.

Editing in Creo Schematics


You can edit the following items in Creo Schematics :

 Edit wire fibers — To edit a wire fiber, double-click the wire in the diagram. You can then make
the following edits to wire fibers in Creo Schematics:

o Drag the diamond symbol near the endpoint to


move the wire to another port. You can also add
or remove jogs from wire fibers.
o Drag the symbols at wire corners to change their
location.

o Drag the segment symbol that displays over a


wire segment to move it to a parallel location.

 Change wire spools — To change spools, you can select the wire fiber, then right-click and
select Properties. This enables you to edit the dataset. The dataset is a set of properties which
represent the spool, as shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3– Viewing a Spool Dataset


 Delete wires, cables, or connectors — To delete wires, cables, or connectors, simply select the
object, then right-click and select Delete.

Creating New Blocks and Wires


In Creo Schematics , you can “instance” blocks, fibers, and so on to create them on a diagram sheet
from the Design Catalog.

Figure 2 – Creating a New Wire Fiber


Once the instancing tool is started, you can select from several folders in the catalog to create the
desired item. The tool enables you to continue instancing the item until you exit the tool. Tools
include:
 Route Fiber — Enables you to create new wire fibers.
 Place Block Instance — Enables you to create new blocks.
Other Creo Schematics Operations
Typically, Creo Schematics remains in the current command until you exit the tool. This is useful
when editing wire paths or when instancing items. To exit the current tool, right-click and select Exit
Tool.

You can also easily undo and redo several editing actions within Creo Schematics using
the Undo and Redo icons in the Quick Access toolbar.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Schematics_Update folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click WIRING.

1. Task 1. Modify the wire routing diagram in Creo Schematics.


1. Zoom in to the wires comprising harness_1.

2. Double-click wire fiber W-3.

3. Drag the fiber diamond symbol to relocate the W-3 wire to port 2.

Figure 1
4. Right-click and select Exit Tool.
5. Double-click wire fiber W-2.

6. Drag the fiber diamond symbol to relocate the W-2 wire to port 1.

Figure 2
7. Right-click and select Exit Tool.
8. Double-click wire fiber W-1.

9. Drag the diamond symbol to add the jog.

10. Double-click wire fiber W-2.


11. Drag the diamond symbol to remove the jog.

Figure 3
12. Repeat this procedure to add a jog to wire W-4 and remove the jog from wire W-3.

13. Right-click and select Exit Tool.


14. Select label W-1, right-click, and select Move.
15. Move the label to the position shown.

16. Move the other three wire fiber labels.

Figure 4
17. Right-click and select Deselect All.
18. Select Route Fiber from the Route drop-down menu in the Insert group.
19. Select the wires folder.
 Select STD_WIRE and click OK.
20. Select port 1, and then port 2.
Figure 5
21. Right-click and select Exit Tool.
22. Select the new wire fiber, right-click, and select Properties.
23. In the Fiber Properties dialog box, edit the Name Format to W-#, which is the convention in this sheet.
 Click Apply Dataset.
24. In the Dataset Selector dialog box, select the 14_blk_sxl spool in row 14.
 Click OK.
25. Click OK in the Fiber Properties dialog box.
Figure 6
26. Select wire fiber W-2, right-click, and select Properties.
27. In the Fiber Properties dialog box, click Apply Dataset.
 In the Dataset Selector dialog box, click Next and select the 16_wht_sxl spool in row 24.
 Click OK, leaving the Fiber Properties dialog box open.

Figure 7
28. Select wire fiber W-4.

29. In the Fiber Properties dialog box, click Apply Dataset.


 Select the 16_wht_sxl spool in row 24.
 Click OK.
 Click OK in the Fiber Properties dialog box.
30. Click File > Save Design from the main menu.
1. Task 2. Re-export the diagram data from Creo Schematics.
1. Click File > Export > XML from the main menu.
2. In the Export to XML dialog box, click File Selector.
3. In the Select export filename dialog box, browse to ..\Cabling\Schematics_Update.
 Type wiring_new.xml as the File Name.
 Click Open.

Figure 8
4. In the Export to XML dialog box, select Pro/CABLING as the Target application.
 Clear the Pre Wildfire 3.0 check box.
 Select the Current sheet option.
 If necessary, select the Duplicate Ref Des check box.
 Click OK.
Figure 9
5. In the message window, notice the message that states the Export to XML is complete.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Updating Creo Parametric with New
Creo Schematics Data
Updating Creo Parametric with New Creo Schematics Data
When a Creo Schematics diagram or other logical source has been updated, you can propagate the
changes in Creo Parametric. With Creo Schematics, you first import the new XML file that was
exported from Creo Schematics. You can then perform the following steps to update the data in Creo
Parametric:

1. Detect changes using a logical compare.

Figure 1 – New, Unmatched Logical Data

2. Make routing modifications if necessary.

3. Check progress of modification using logical compare.

In Figure 2, you can see the routed wiring in the original design.

Figure 2 – Viewing Wires Before the Update


In Figure 3, you can now see the updates that have been made in Creo Schematics and propagated
into Creo Parametric.
Figure 3 – Viewing Wires After the Update
The following updates have been made:
1. Two wire spools were changed.

2. Two wires were moved to different connector ports.

3. A new wire was routed.

Referencing and Managing Logical Information


You can reference and manage logical information from the Logical Data group. Options in the
Logical Data group include the following:

 Import — Enables you to import logical data from an ASCII wire list file. The following types of
files can be imported:

o RS Designer — Enables you to import an *.xml file.

o PTC Neutral — Enables you to import an *.nwf file.

o Mentor Graph

 Clear Reference — Clears all logical information from the current model.

 Compare — Creates a text window comparing imported logical data with the 3-D model data.

 Update — Updates previous logical data with new logical data.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Parametric_Update folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Import the new Creo Schematics data into Creo Parametric.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Compare from the Logical Data group.


10. Select the Alphabetical check box, if necessary, and click Execute.
11. In the Information Window, notice that all wires and cables are matched with YES.

 Click Close.

Figure 1

12. In the ribbon, click Import from the Logical Data group.
13. Click RS Designer > Whole XML from the menu manager.
14. In the File Open dialog box, double-click WIRING_NEW.XML.

15. In the message window, notice the message states that the XML file has been read successfully.

16. In the ribbon, click Update from the Logical Data group.
17. In the menu manager, click Select All > Done Sel.
18. Click Compare , then click Execute.
19. In the Information Window, notice that the wire W-9 status is missing and note the NO status for wires
W-2 and W-3.

 Click Close.

Figure 2
1. Task 2. Update the Creo Parametric cabling assembly.
1. Notice the current routed wires.

Figure 3
2. Click Regenerate from the Quick Access Toolbar and notice that the wire colors updated due to
the new spool assignments.
Figure 4

3. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
4. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
5. In the graphics window, press CTRL and select the upper white W-2 wire and blue W-3 wire.

6. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box and notice that the wires reroute to the new ports
automatically.

Figure 5
7. Enable Center Line .
8. Click Route Cables , then click Find .
 Select wire W-9 and click Add , then click OK.
9. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
10. Enable Thick Cables .
Figure 6
11. Click Compare , then click Execute.
12. In the Information Window, notice that all wires and cables are now matched with YES status.

 Click Close.
This completes the procedure.
Creating Harness Components and Cosmetics
Module Overview:
The routing process can also involve creating splice components that electrically connect wires within
a harness. Wires can be configured to stop or pass through the splices. You can also group wires
together into bundles, as well as assign sheaths to bundles.

You can also easily add labels to wires, and enhance the display of wires and cables by adding
cosmetic features such as tape, markers, and tie wraps.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Create splices with logical data.

 Create splices manually.

 Create sheath spools.

 Create bundles.

 Create cabling cosmetics.

 Create custom components.


Concept: Creating Splices with Logical Data
Creating Splices with Logical Data
Some wiring diagrams require that wires be joined together. This is called a splice. To splice wires
you can use a splice connector. There are two different types of splices:
 Through splice — A wire passes through the splice. In Figure 3, the white wire passes through
the upper splice where the red wire is joined.

Figure 3 – Viewing Routing After Added Splices

This splice is a through splice.


 Butt splice — Each wire starts and ends at the splice. In Figure 3, the green, white, and blue
wires all terminate at the lower splice. This splice is a butt splice.

You can place a splice into the assembly using either of the following two methods:

 Add the splice to an existing wire location point. The specified splice coordinate system is placed
on the specified location point in the assembly.

 Assemble the splice using conventional assembly constraints within Assembly mode.

You can also control the wire paths for any wires that run through the splice. This is done by
specifying the entry and exit paths of the splice connector for these through wires. Since butt type
wires terminate at the splice you cannot specify their entry and exit paths. Rather, you simply route
the To and From references, or insert the wire ends into the connector.

Importing and Updating Logical Information


If you update the Creo Schematics design to include splices, you must import and update the logical
references information.
Figure 1 – Viewing the Creo Schematics Diagram with Splices
This is necessary for correct wire routing and autodesignation of splice components. In Figure 2,
notice that no wire splices are present.

Figure 2 – Viewing Routing Before Added Splices


In Figure 3, notice that splices SP-01 and SP-02 have been inserted into the assembly. Upper splice
SP-01 is a through splice, while lower splice SP-02 is a butt splice.
Modifying Splices
You can modify the splice electrical parameters by clicking Cabling Parameters from the Components
group. You can also edit the splice entry ports, its placement, and internal portions such as wire
paths. These operations can be accomplished by selecting Component Operations from the
Components group drop-down menu and selecting the desired menu manager item.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Splices_Logical folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Update logical information in Creo Parametric.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Review the image of the updated Creo Schematics diagram.

 Notice that splines SP-01 and SP-02 have been inserted.

 Spline SP-01 is a through splice.

 Spline SP-02 is a butt splice.

Figure 1

11. In the ribbon, click Import from the Logical Data group.
12. Click RS Designer > Whole XML from the menu manager.
13. In the File Open dialog box, double-click WIRING_SPLICES.XML.
14. In the ribbon, click Update from the Logical Data group.
15. In the menu manager, click Select All > Done Sel.
1. Task 2. Create the through splice in the cabling assembly.
1. Notice that wires have been edited in the cabling assembly. A portion of the red W-1 wire has been
deleted, and a separate location on the white W-2 wire has been created.

Figure 2
2. In the ribbon, click Insert Component from the Components group.
3. Double-click SPLICE_2-1.PRT in the Open dialog box.

4. Enable Csys Display .


5. Zoom in on the splice component in the sub-window and select coordinate system IN_1.

6. Select Splice as the Component Type in the Place Component dialog box.
 Select the location point as the Cable Location.

 Select row SP-01 as the Reference Designator, if necessary, and click OK.

Figure 3
7. Click Done from the menu manager.
8. In the Cable Paths Setup dialog box, select the W-2 row.

 Click Select Exit Path and select coordinate system OUT.


 Select Yes for the Show option, then click OK.
Figure 4
9. Click Update .
10. Notice that splice SP-01 is in the menu manager list.

11. From the menu manager, click Select All > Done Sel.
12. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
13. Click No in the Component Designation message window.
14. Select the incomplete red W-1 wire in the graphics window.

Figure 5
15. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
1. Task 3. Create the butt splice in the cabling assembly.
1. Notice that wires have been edited in the cabling assembly. A portion of the blue W-3 and white W-4
wires has been deleted.

Figure 6
2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab and click Cabling from the Engineering group.
3. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
4. Click Assemble from the Component group and double-click SPLICE_2-1.PRT.
 Drag the model to the approximate location and orient it.

 Select the main cabling assembly surface and query-select the bottom flat splice surface to
create the Coincident constraint.

 Further orient if necessary, right-click, and select Fix Constraint.


 Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

Figure 7
5. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
6. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
7. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
8. In the ribbon, click Auto Designate from the Logical Data group.
 Notice that SP-02 now has a Status of Auto Match.
 Click OK.

Figure 8
9. Click Update .
10. In the menu manager, click Select All > Done Sel.
11. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group.
12. In the Route cables dialog box, click Find .
 Click wire W-10 and drag to select wires W-3 and W-4, then click Add and click OK.
13. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.
14. Disable Csys Display .
15. Enable Thick Cables .
Figure 9
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Splices Manually
Creating Splices Manually
Some wiring diagrams require that wires be joined together. This is called a splice. To splice wires
you can use a splice connector. There are two different types of splices:
 Through splice — A wire passes through the splice. In Figure 2, the white wire passes through
the upper splice where the red wire is joined.

Figure 2 – Viewing Routing After Added Splices

This splice is a through splice.


 Butt splice — Each wire starts and ends at the splice. In Figure 2, the green, white, and blue
wires all terminate at the lower splice. This splice is a butt splice.

You can place a splice into the assembly using either of the following two methods:

 Add the splice to an existing wire location point. The specified splice coordinate system is placed
on the specified location point in the assembly.

 Assemble the splice using conventional assembly constraints within Assembly mode.

You can also control the wire paths for any wires that run through the splice. This is done by
specifying the entry and exit paths of the splice connector for these “through” wires. Since butt type
wires terminate at the splice you cannot specify their entry and exit paths. Rather, you simply route
the To and From references, or insert the wire ends into the connector.

Manually Designating Splice Components


If you wish to include splices in your assembly, and have not created the wiring diagram in Creo
Schematics, you must manually designate the splice components. This establishes the logical
references for the cabling assembly.

In Figure 1, notice that no wire splices are present.

Figure 1 – Viewing Routing Before Added Splices


In Figure 2, notice that splices SP-01 and SP-02 have been inserted into the assembly. Upper splice
SP-01 is a through splice, while lower splice SP-02 is a butt splice.
Modifying Splices
You can modify the splice electrical parameters by clicking Cabling Parameters from the Components
group. You can also edit the splice entry ports, its placement, and internal portions such as wire
paths. These operations can be accomplished by selecting Component Operations from the
Components group drop-down menu and selecting the desired menu manager item.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Splices_Manual folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create the through splice in the cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Notice that wires have been edited in the cabling assembly. The routing of the red W-1 wire has been
deleted, and a separate location on the white W-2 wire has been created.

Figure 1
11. In the ribbon, click Insert Component from the Components group.
12. Double-click SPLICE_2-1.PRT in the Open dialog box.

13. Enable Csys Display .


14. Zoom in on the splice component in the sub-window and select coordinate system IN_1.

15. Select Splice as the Component Type in the Place Component dialog box.
 Select the location point as the Cable Location.

 In the Place Component dialog box, click in the Create Ref Des field and type SP-01.
 Click OK.
Figure 2
16. Click Done from the menu manager.
17. In the Cable Paths Setup dialog box, select the W-2 row.

 Click Select Exit Path and select coordinate system OUT.


 Select Yes for the Show option and click OK.

Figure 3
18. In the ribbon, click Cabling Parameters from the Components group.
19. Select the splice part in the graphics window and click OK.
20. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, select SPLICE in the Type column.

 Select CONNECTOR from the Value drop-down list.

 Select Entry Ports.


 Expand the SPLICE_2-1 and Entry Ports nodes and notice that the Type was automatically set
to ROUND.
 Edit all four INT_LENGTH values to 2.
 Click OK.
Figure 4
21. Enable Ref Designator Labels .
22. Click Route Cables from the Route group.
23. In the Route cables dialog box, click Find .
 Select the W-1 wire and click Add , then click OK.
24. Right-click and select From.
25. Select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the M-02 connector.

26. For the To collector, select coordinate system IN_2 on the SP-01 connector.
27. Click OK in the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 5
o Wires manually routed to splices retain their broken symbols unless the type is changed to
CONNECTOR.

1. Task 2. Create the butt splice in the cabling assembly.


1. Notice that wires have been edited in the cabling assembly. The routing of the white W-3 and blue W-
4 wires has been deleted.

Figure 6
2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab and click Cabling from the Engineering group.
3. In the ribbon, select the Model tab.
4. Click Assemble from the Component group and double-click SPLICE_2-1.PRT.
 Drag the model to the approximate location and orient it.
 Select the main cabling assembly surface and query-select the bottom flat splice surface to
create the Coincident constraint.

 Further orient if necessary, then right-click and select Fix Constraint.


 Click Complete Component from the dashboard.

Figure 7
5. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
6. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
7. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
8. Select Designate from the Auto Designate drop-down menu.
9. Select the new splice in the graphics window and press ENTER to accept the default parameters.

10. Click Entry Ports from the menu manager.


11. Press CTRL and select the IN_1, IN_2, and OUT coordinate systems.

12. Click OK in the Select dialog box.


13. Edit the internal length to 2.
14. Click ROUND > Done > Done from the menu manager.
15. In the ribbon, click Cabling Parameters from the Components group.
16. Select the new splice in the graphics window and click OK.
17. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, click SPLICE_2-1 in the REF_DES column.

 Type SP-02 as the Value and press ENTER.


 Click OK.

Figure 8
18. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click Find .
19. Click wire W-3 and drag to also select wire W-4, then click Add and click OK.
20. In the Route cables dialog box, select wire W-3.

21. Right-click and select From.


22. Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

23. For the To collector, select coordinate system IN_1 on the SP-02 connector.

Figure 9
24. In the Route cables dialog box, select wire W-4.

25. Right-click and select From.


26. Select coordinate system ENTRY_1 on the M-02 connector.

27. For the To collector, select coordinate system IN_2 on the SP-02 connector.

Figure 10
28. Click Apply in the Route cables dialog box.
29. In the Route cables dialog box, click New Wire .
 Select 16_GREEN from the Spool drop-down list.

 Edit the Name to W-10 if necessary.


 For the From collector, select coordinate system OUT on the SP-02 connector.
 For the To collector, select coordinate system ENTRY_2 on the C-02 connector.
 Click OK.
Figure 11

30. Disable Csys Display .


31. Enable Thick Cables .
32. Disable Ref Designator Labels .

Figure 12
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Sheath Spools
Creating Sheath Spools
Sheath spools are created as the material for creating bundles and tape. Consider the following
information regarding bundle sheath spools:

 Bundle sheath spools are of type SHRINK.

Figure 1 – Viewing Bundle Sheath Spool Information

 You must set sheath spool parameters such as SHEATH_TYPE and


PRESHRINK_INNER_DIAMETER. Other common parameters are NAME, TYPE, and UNITS.
The MIN_BEND_RADIUS and WALL_THICKNESS parameters are automatically generated.

Consider the following information regarding tape sheath spools:

 Tape sheath spools are of type TAPE.

Figure 2 – Viewing Tape Sheath Spool Information

 You must set the sheath spool parameter for TYPE. Other common parameters are
WALL_THICKNESS, MIN_BEND_RADIUS, UNITS, COLOR, and WIDTH.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Spools_Sheath folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click ASM0001.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create sheath spools for shrink tubing and tape.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.


3. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
4. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

5. In the ribbon, click Spools from the Logical Data group.


6. In the menu manager, click Create > Sheath.
7. Type SHRINK_1 as the spool name and press ENTER.
8. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, click View > Columns.
9. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select COLOR, click Add Column , and click OK.

Figure 1
10. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the WALL_THICKNESS to 0.15.
 Edit the MIN_BEND_RADIUS to 1.
 Edit the PRESHRINK_INNER_DIAMETER to 20.
 Edit the COLOR to BLACK.
 Click OK.

Figure 2
11. In the menu manager, click Create > Sheath.
12. Type TAPE_1 as the spool name and press ENTER.
13. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, click View > Columns.
14. In the Model Tree Columns dialog box, select PRESHRINK_INNER_DIAMETER and click Remove
Column .
 Select WIDTH, click Add Column , and click OK.
Figure 3
15. In the Electrical Parameters dialog box, edit the SHEATH_TYPE to TAPE.

 Edit the WALL_THICKNESS to 0.1.


 Edit the MIN_BEND_RADIUS to 1.
 Edit the COLOR to BLACK.
 Edit the WIDTH to 10.
 Click OK.

Figure 4
16. In the menu manager, click Write.
17. In the Select Spools dialog box, select SHRINK_1, if necessary, and click OK.
18. In the menu manager, click Write.
19. In the Select Spools dialog box, select TAPE_1, if necessary, and click OK.
20. Click Done/Return from the menu manager.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Bundles
Creating Bundles
A bundle is a sheath feature containing one or more cables, wires, or other bundles that pass through
the same location. Bundles are typically created from sheath spools, although you can also create a
bundle without a sheath spool.

Figure 1 – Viewing a Bundle


Bundles have thickness, color, and minimum bend radius parameters of their own. In lists of cables or
wires, as well as in the model tree, bundle names are marked by an asterisk.
You can add cables to a bundle after they are routed. To sheath wires that branch from the bundle in
a T-junction, you can add a branch bundle at a selected location along the main bundle. Branch
bundles allow cables to leave a bundle in sheathed branches.

Figure 2 – Viewing a Branch Bundle


Use the following procedure to determine the branch location:
 Select an existing location on the original bundle.

 If cables diverge in two directions, select both the locations where the cables diverge from the
original bundle and find a midpoint between the two locations.

Consider the following information about bundles:

 While creating bundles before routing, it is not necessary to create a bundle to route multiple
cables at the same time.
 The minimum bend radius of bundled wires is either one-half of the bundle diameter, or the
largest MIN_BEND_RADIUS of any component of the bundle, whichever is larger.

Bundle Routing Options


The following bundle routing options are available:

 Along Path — Enables you to place a branch on existing wires, or you can place the branch on a
network, and then add wires to the bundle.

 Branch — Creates a branch from an existing bundle.

Bundle Shape
The following shapes are available when creating bundles:

 Round — As subsequent wires are


added to the bundle, they are
arranged into concentric rings around
the initial wire.

 Flat — As subsequent wires are


added to the bundle, they are
arranged into a flat row from the initial
wire.

Aligning and Unaligning Bundles


When several bundles meet at a single location, the bundle ends may be aligned or unaligned by
default. If bundle ends at a single location are aligned by default, they can be unaligned. Similarly, if
bundle ends at a single location are unaligned by default, they can be aligned. You can access the
align and unalign functions by selecting Bundle Alignment from the Bundle types drop-down menu in
the Route group.

Modifying Bundles
You can modify bundles by selecting Modify Bundle from the Bundle types drop-down menu. The
following modifications are available:

 Add Cable — Enables you to add cables to an existing bundle.

 Del Cable — Enables you to delete cables from the existing bundle.

 Extract — Enables you to extract cables from the existing bundle.


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Bundles folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create a bundle and branch bundle on HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Spools from the Logical Data group.
11. In the menu manager, click Read.
12. In the Open dialog box, select Working Directory in the Common Folders area and then double-
click SHRINK_1.SPL.
13. Select Create Bundle from the Bundle types drop-down menu in the Route group.
14. Type B1 as the bundle name and press ENTER.
15. In the menu manager, click Round > SHRINK_1 > Along Path.
16. Select the two location points between which to create the bundle.

Figure 1
17. Click Yes in the Confirmation message window.
18. In the menu manager, click Select All > Done Sel and press ENTER to accept the default bundle
parameters.
19. Enable Thick Cables .
Figure 2

20. Enable Center Line .


21. Click Create Bundle , type B2 as the bundle name, and press ENTER.
22. In the menu manager, click Round > SHRINK_1 > Branch.
23. Press CTRL and select the two location points.

Figure 3
24. Select the third location point to define the other end of the branch.
Figure 4
25. Press ENTER to accept the default bundle parameters.

26. Enable Thick Cables .

Figure 5

27. Enable Center Line .


1. Task 2. Create a bundle on HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done.
2. Click Create Bundle , type B3 as the bundle name, and press ENTER.
3. In the menu manager, click Round > SHRINK_1 > Along Path.
4. Select the two location points and press ENTER.
Figure 6

5. In the ribbon, click Route Cables from the Route group and click Find .
6. Click wire W-6 and drag to select through wire W-8, then click Add and click OK.
7. Notice the wire preview and click OK in the Route cables dialog box.

Figure 7
 The wires are routed along the bundle's path due to network priority settings.

8. Select Modify Bundle from the Bundle types drop-down menu.


9. Select the B3 bundle in the graphics window.
10. In the menu manager, click Add Cable.
11. Press CTRL and select wires W-6, W-7, and W-8 in the graphics window.

12. Click OK in the Select dialog box.


13. Enable Thick Cables .
Figure 8
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Cabling Cosmetics
Creating Cabling Cosmetics
You can create cosmetic cabling features including tie wraps, markers, and tape.

Figure 1 – Viewing a Tie Wrap

Figure 2 – Viewing a Marker

Figure 3 – Viewing Tape


Tape requires that you use a sheath spool of type TAPE. You can also specify the number of winds,
which affects the diameter in the model.
As in Part mode, cosmetics are comprised of non-solid surfaces. Therefore, they do not affect mass
properties. However, you can list them in a BOM.

To display cosmetic name tags, as shown in the figures, you must enable Point Display .
To modify cosmetics, you can click the Cosmetics group drop-down menu and select Modify
Cosmetics. You can modify the cosmetic name, for example, as well as parameters including the
number of tape winds.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Cosmetics folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create a tie wrap, marker, and tape in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. Click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from the menu
manager.
10. In the ribbon, click Tie Wrap from the Cosmetics group.
11. Type T1 as the tie wrap feature name and press ENTER.
12. Select the location point.

Figure 1
13. Enable Thick Cables .
14. Enable Point Display .
15. Rotate the model and view the tie wrap.
Figure 2
16. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

17. Disable Point Display .


18. Enable Center Line .
19. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_2 > Done.
20. In the ribbon, click Marker from the Cosmetics group.
21. Type M1 as the marker name and press ENTER.
22. Select the wire segment.

Figure 3
23. Type 15 for the marker length and press ENTER.
24. Type 5 for the expanded diameter and press ENTER.
25. Press ENTER to accept the default reduced diameter.

26. Enable Thick Cables .


27. Enable Point Display .
28. Rotate the model and view the marker.
Figure 4
29. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

30. Disable Point Display .


31. Enable Center Line .
32. In the ribbon, click Spools from the Logical Data group.
33. Click Read from the menu manager.
34. In the Open dialog box, select Working Directory in the Common Folders area and then double-click
TAPE_1.SPL.
35. In the ribbon, click Tape from the Cosmetics group.
36. Type TP1 as the tape name and press ENTER.
37. In the menu manager, click TAPE_1.

38. Type 6 for the number of winds and press ENTER.


39. Select the location point.

Figure 5
40. Enable Thick Cables .
41. Enable Point Display .
42. Rotate the model and view the tape.
Figure 6
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Custom Components
Creating Custom Components
You can create custom components to attach to wire and cable location points. For example, custom
components enable you to use solid zip ties.

Figure 1 – Viewing Custom-Created Solid Model Zip Ties


If the model you use to create the custom component is solid, it affects mass properties.

Creating custom components is similar to placing a splice. The main difference is that you specify
Custom in the Place Component dialog box. However, you must still specify a coordinate system on
the component and a location point on the cable for placement. Once the component is placed you
can flip it or twist it.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Components_Custom folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create custom components in a cabling assembly.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
3. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
4. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
5. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
6. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
7. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
8. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

9. In the ribbon, click Modify Harness from the Harness group and click HARNESS_1 > Done from
the menu manager.
10. Click Insert Component from the Components group.
11. In the Place Component dialog box, click Open and double-click ZIP.PRT.
 Select the ZIP_3-5 instance and click Open.
12. Enable Csys Display .
13. Zoom in on the zip component in the sub-window and select coordinate system ATTACH.

14. Select Custom as the Component Type in the Place Component dialog box.
15. Select the network location point to place the zip tie.

Figure 1
16. Click OK in the Place Component dialog box.
17. Click Twist > Enter Value from the menu manager.
18. Type 270 and press ENTER.
19. Click Done > Done from the menu manager.
20. Click OK in the Cable Paths Setup dialog box.
Figure 2
21. Click Insert Component from the Components group.
22. In the Place Component dialog box, click Open and double-click ZIP.PRT.
 Select the ZIP_7-5 instance and click Open.
23. Select coordinate system ATTACH in the sub-window.

24. Select Custom as the Component Type in the Place Component dialog box.
25. Select the network location point to place the zip tie.

Figure 3
26. Click OK in the Place Component dialog box.
27. Click Twist > Enter Value.
28. Type 180 and press ENTER.
29. Click Done > Done from the menu manager.
30. Click OK in the Cable Paths Setup dialog box.
Figure 4
31. Enable Thick Cables .
32. Disable Csys Display .
33. In the graphics window, select the first zip tie component, right-click, and select Replace.
34. Click Open in the Replace dialog box.
35. Select the ZIP_4-25 instance and click OK.
36. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.

Figure 5
37. In the graphics window, select the second zip tie component, right-click, and select Replace.
38. Click Open in the Replace dialog box.
39. Select the ZIP_5 instance and click OK.
40. Click OK in the Replace dialog box.
Figure 6
This completes the procedure.
Creating Flat Harnesses
Module Overview:
You can create a flattened version of the 3-D harness design in preparation for documenting it in a
drawing. Flattened harnesses are created by using location points to configure flat segments within
the harness. The flattening process can be completed manually or automatically. By default, flattened
harnesses only include routed entities. However, connectors can also be assembled. You can track
the progress of flattening harnesses by using information tools that determine how many segments
have been flattened.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Create a flat harness model.

 Use both manual and auto fan.

 Modify flattened segments.

 Assemble harness components.

 Analyze harness component operations.

 View harness information.

 Close loops.

 Investigate additional flatten features.


Concept: Creating a Flat Harness Model
Understanding Harness Mode
Harness Manufacturing mode enables you to create a flattened version of the 3-D wire harness. The
flattened harness is typically used for nail-board style drawings. The harness is created as a type of
manufacturing file, but it is saved with a *.asm file extension.

Harness Manufacturing mode generates two windows:

1. The main window, which contains the flattened harness segments.

2. A sub window, which contains the 3-D wire harness, extracted from the model.

As the wire segments to be flattened are specified in the sub window, the resulting flattened segments
appear in the main window. The flattened harness model maintains associativity with the original 3-D
wire harness. So if wire lengths are modified in the cabling assembly, they update in the flattened
model.

Creating a Harness Manufacturing Model


There are four steps when creating a harness manufacturing model:

1. Create a new harness manufacturing model by clicking New from the Quick Access toolbar
and selecting Manufacturing as the Type and Harness as the Sub-type. You can then provide a
name, name1.asm, for example.
2. Specify the harness model to flatten.

3. Specify the desired harness model simplified representation to use.

4. Specify or accept the name of the flat harness, name2.asm, for example. The flattened harness
is created as an assembly rather than a part model because this enables the connector models
to be assembled into the flat harness.

Figure 1 – Harness Mode Main Window

Window Management
There are two windows used when creating a flat harness model and it is important to manage the
windows properly. Try to keep both the main window and sub window visible while working, because
useful information may be found in both windows at the same time.
Figure 2 – Minimized Sub Window
To prevent the sub window from falling behind the main window, you can minimize the sub window.
When you minimize the sub window an icon displays in the upper-left corner of the graphics window
in the main window. You can click this icon to restore the sub window as needed.

Figure 3 — Harness Mode Sub Window

Configuration Files
You can configure the template model for the flat harness using the following config.pro options:

 harn_start_model_dir — Enables you to specify the directory location of the harness template
model.

 template_harnesspart — Enables you to specify the name of the default template model to use
for the flat harness.

Best Practices
Create a FRONT view orientation in the flattened harness model. This is typically the view that is used
in a drawing.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Create folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM .

1. Task 1. Create harness FLAT_HARN1.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Set the config option fan_with_network to NO in config.pro.

 Click File > Options.


 Click Configuration Editor in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
 Click Add.
 Type fan_with_network in the Option name field and select no from the Option value drop-
down list.
 Click OK and then click OK in the Creo Parametric Options dialog box.
 Click No in the Creo Parametric Options warning message window.
3. Select Appearances Manager from the Appearance Gallery types drop-down list.
4. Click File > Open in the Appearances Manager dialog box.
5. Select WIRE_COLORS.DMT, then click Open.
6. Click Override all in the Warning message window, then click Close.
7. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
8. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
9. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 Click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark Background as the Color
Scheme and click OK.
10. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

11. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar.


12. In the New dialog box, select Manufacturing as the Type and Harness as the Sub-type.
 Type flat_harn1 as the Name and click OK.
13. In the Open dialog box, double-click HARNESS_1.PRT as the harness to flatten.

14. Click OK in the Open Rep dialog box.


15. Click OK to accept the default assembly flat harness name.

Figure 1
16. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

17. Minimize the HARNESS_1.PRT sub-window.


18. Notice the symbol in the FLAT_HARN1.ASM window.

Figure 2
19. From the In Graphics toolbar, select Reorient from the Named Views drop-down menu.
20. Select datum plane FLAT_HARNESS_FRONT as Reference 1.

21. Select datum plane FLAT_HARNESS_TOP as Reference 2.

22. In the Orientation dialog box, expand the Saved Views area if necessary.
 In the Name field, type FRONT and click Save > OK.

Figure 3
23. Click File > Save.
 Click OK to save the model.
 Click OK in the Conflicts message window.
24. Click File > Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
1. Task 2. Create harness FLAT_HARN2.PRT.
1. Click New and select Manufacturing as the Type and Harness as the Sub-type.
2. In the New dialog box, type flat_harn2 as the Name and click OK.
3. In the Open dialog box, double-click HARNESS_2.PRT as the harness to flatten.

4. Click OK in the Open Rep dialog box.


5. Click OK to accept the default assembly flat harness name.
Figure 4
6. Minimize the HARNESS_2.PRT sub-window and notice the symbol in the FLAT_HARN2.ASM
window.

Figure 5
7. Click File > Save.
 Click OK to save the model.
 Click OK in the Conflicts message window.
8. Click File > Close to return to CABLING.ASM.
9. To be able to view the 3-D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Using Manual Fan
Using Manual Fan
Using Manual Fanning, you select the start and end locations, between which to flatten the extracted
3-D harness. The system then prompts for the bend radius and bend angle for each segment
between the selected locations.

 Set start point — Enables you to set the start point from which harness flattening begins. It is
typically recommended to start flattening near the center of the harness in a thick trunk location
and work outwards.

Figure 1 – Selecting the Start Point


 Bend radius — You must type a bend radius in order for the segments to be flattened. You
cannot specify radius values less than the smallest bend radius of the wires to be flattened.

Figure 2 — Selecting the End Point


 Bend angle — You must type a bend angle for the flattened segments. The arrow indicates the
direction of an angle value of zero. You can type both positive and negative angles. In figure 3,
the arrow pointing horizontally to the right indicates an angle value of zero. The blue and white
wire segment ends were bent an angle of 45 degrees.

Figure 3 — Viewing the Manually Fanned Wire Segments


The configuration option fan_with_network has been set to no for this topic's procedure. This
prevents the network, which may contain segments with wires that do not follow, from displaying in
the flattened harness.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Manual-Fan folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Fan out the harness manually.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Lay Out.
4. Select the start point on the black wire.

Figure 1
5. Select the end point on the black wire.

Figure 2
6. Type 2 for the bend radius and press ENTER.
7. Type 0 for the angle and press ENTER.
8. Type 2 for each bend radius and 0 for each angle of each segment that is to be flattened. There
should be four more segments.
9. Disable Plane Display .
Figure 3
10. Click Set Start Pnt from the menu manager.
11. Select the start point on the white wire.

Figure 4
12. Specify the end point by selecting the point on the white wire to the left of the start point.

13. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.


14. Type -45 as the angle and press ENTER.
15. Click Set Start Pnt from the menu manager.
16. Select the start point on the white wire.

Figure 5
17. Specify the end by selecting the point on the white wire to the left of the start point.

18. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.


19. Type 45 as the angle and press ENTER.
20. Review the flattened model.
Figure 6
21. Click Set Start Pnt from the menu manager.
22. Select the start point on the white wire.

Figure 7
23. Select the end point on the white wire.

Figure 8
24. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
25. Type -90 as the angle and press ENTER.
26. Type 2 as the radius.
27. Type 0 as the angle.
28. Click Set Start Pnt from the menu manager.
29. Select the start point on the red wire.
Figure 9
30. Select the end point on the red wire.

Figure 10
31. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
32. Type 0 as the angle and press ENTER.
33. Click Done/Quit from the menu manager.
34. Review the flattened state.

Figure 11
35. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Using Auto Fan
Using Auto Fan
Auto Fan speeds up the flattening process by attempting to flatten all segments, given a selected start
point and a global bend radius. Different shapes and orientations for the flattened harness will be
generated based on the selected start point, so you may wish to experiment with different start points.
When using auto fan, the system automatically generates its own bend angles as it fans out the
segments. Segments can be dragged or modified as desired, and bend radii can be modified after
using auto fan.

You can also manually fan the first few segments if necessary and then auto fan the remainder of the
harness, as it is not always possible to auto fan the entire harness.

If a loop is detected in the harness, you must select which side of the loop you would like to flatten. It
is recommended that you select the smallest or tightest radius portion of the loop.

When using auto fan, you must specify the start point and the bend radius:

 Set start point — You must specify the start point for the auto fan process. The start point
determines from where the harness is flattened.

Figure 1 – Selecting the Start Point


 Bend radius — You must type a bend radius for all segments when using auto fan.

Figure 2 – Specifying the Loop to Flatten


Figure 3 – Viewing the Flattened Harness

The configuration option fan_with_network has been set to no for this topic's procedure. This
prevents the network, which may contain segments with wires that do not follow, from displaying in
the flattened harness.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Auto-Fan folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Create an auto fan harness named HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types:

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Lay Out.
4. Select the start point.

Figure 1
5. Click Auto Fan from the menu manager.
6. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
7. Select the branch as the path to flatten.

Figure 2
8. Minimize the HARNESS_1.PRT sub-window.

9. Disable Plane Display .


10. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

Figure 3
11. Click Save from the Quick Access toolbar and click OK to save the model.
12. Click File > Close.
1. Task 2. Create an auto fan harness named HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
2. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Lay Out.
3. Select the start point.

Figure 4
4. Click Auto Fan from the menu manager.
5. Press ENTER to accept the default bend radius.

6. Minimize the HARNESS_2.PRT sub-window.

Figure 5
7. Click Save and click OK to save the model.
8. To be able to view the 3-D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Modifying Flattened Segments
Modifying Flattened Segments
When working in Harness manufacturing mode, the main window contains the flattened version of the
3-D harness, and not the actual 3-D harness. Therefore, you can simply delete flattened segments
and re-flatten them using an alternate technique if desired.

Figure 3 – Deleting and Re-Creating a Segment

You can modify flattened wire segments using either of the following methods:

 Move wire segments – You can use the Move Segment option to drag flattened segments as
desired.

Figure 2 – Moving a Segment


 Edit dimensions – You can use the Modify option to edit flattened dimension values such as
bend radii or bend angles.

Figure 1 – Editing Segment Dimensions


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Modify folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Modify the flattened harness segments.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

Figure 1
4. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Delete.
5. Select the lower-right segment.

Figure 2
6. Click Delete All > Done from the menu manager.
7. In the menu manager, click Lay Out > Set Start Pnt.
8. In the HARNESS_1.PRT sub window, select the location on the white wire.
Figure 3
9. Click Auto Fan from the menu manager.
10. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
11. Notice that the deleted segment is re-created.

12. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Move Segment.


13. Click both segments on the right and drag them to the new location.

Figure 4
14. Click both segments on the left and drag them to the new location.

Figure 5
15. Click Done/Quit from the menu manager.
16. In the menu manager, click Modify.
17. Select the two segments.

Figure 6
Figure 7
18. Edit the three dimensions to the values shown.

Figure 8
19. In the menu manager, click Regenerate > Automatic.
Figure 9
20. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Assembling Harness Components
Assembling Harness Components
You can assemble connectors to the flattened harness. The system automatically attaches the
appropriate connector at the end of each wire, because the wires and cables were connected to
specific connectors during the routing process. You can rapidly assemble each connector, and adjust
its orientation as desired. Options include:

 Assemble – Assembles the appropriate connector to the selected location.

Figure 1 – Flattened Harness Without Connectors Assembled

 Assemble All – Assembles all connectors to their appropriate locations. It is typically


recommended to use the Assemble All function because the system automatically assembles
each connector to the shortest wire leading to the connector. This eases the fan out process.

 Orient Angle – Enables you to control the orientation angle of the connector with respect to the
wires.

 Align Angle – Enables you to align a plane on the connector with a selected planar surface.

 Disassemble – Enables you to remove the selected connector.


Figure 2 – Flattened Harness With Connectors Assembled

 Redefine – Redefines the connector placement, enabling you to change its orientation angle.

You can control whether parent connectors are to be assembled automatically using the
assemble_parent_connector option. A yes value assembles a parent connector on locations that
reference a subconductor. A no value assembles the connected components.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Components folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Assemble the connector components into the wiring harness.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

Figure 1
4. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Components > Assemble.
5. Select the location on the right end of the blue wire.

Figure 2
6. Notice the orientation options, and click Done from the menu manager.
7. In the menu manager, click Disassemble.
8. Select the connector and click Done.
9. In the menu manager, click Assemble All.

Figure 3
10. In the menu manager, click Redefine.
11. Select the right connector.

12. Click Orient Angle from the menu manager.


13. Type 180 and press ENTER.
14. Click Move Segment in the menu manager, and drag the black wire as necessary.

Figure 4
15. Drag the wires on the left connector as necessary.

Figure 5
16. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Analyzing Harness Component
Operations
Analyzing Harness Component Operations
Once the connectors have been assembled, you can use the Fan Out and Flat Orient component
operations.

 Fan Out – Places each flattened wire into its destination in the connector. You can also use Fan
Out All operation. With either of these operations, the “loose” wire end should jump to the nearby
connector coordinate system. The wire display as wavy, or loose, because they are longer than
the neighboring segment.

Figure 2 – Fanning Out Wires


If wire lengths are not adequate, those segments will not fan out. If this happens, you can use
the following options before trying the Fan Out operation again:
o Move the loose segments closer to the coordinate system location.

o Drag or edit the angle of the wires heading into the connector. The closer the angle is to 0
degrees, the easier the system can flatten the wires.

o Use the Fix Length option to increase wire lengths in the 3-D model and regenerate the flat
harness model.

If the wires still do not fan out, you can move the segment as close as possible to zero degrees.
The Fan Out operation is for visualization purposes only.
 Flat Orient – Enables you to change the orientation of any flat locations. You can toggle their
orientations between horizontal and vertical. In Figure 1, the flat location is oriented horizontally.

Figure 1 – Viewing Original Horizontal Flat Location


In Figure 3, the flat location has been reoriented vertically.
Figure 3 – Viewing Vertically Flat-Oriented Location
Flat locations do not need to be fanned out, and therefore are easier to work with in the flat
harness mode.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Component-Operations folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Fan out the wires that are attached to the connectors in
FLAT_HARN1.ASM.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

Figure 1
4. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Components > Fan Out.
5. Select the middle component.

Figure 2
6. Click Fan Out All from the menu manager.

Figure 3
7. Click File > Close.
1. Task 2. Perform harness component operations to connectors in
FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
2. Double-click FLAT_HARN2.ASM.

3. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Components > Assemble All.

Figure 4
4. Click Fan Out All > Done/Quit from the menu manager.

Figure 5
5. In the menu manager, click Modify.
6. Select the black wire segment that is farthest to the right.

7. Edit the angle value to 0.


Figure 6
8. Click Regenerate > Automatic in the menu manager.

Figure 7
9. Notice the angle of the flat location on the left connector.

Figure 8
10. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Lay Out > Flat Orient > Vertical > Done/Return > Done/Quit.
 Click Regenerate > Automatic.

Figure 9
11. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Viewing Harness Information
Viewing Harness Information
You can view information about the wiring harness using the Harness Info and Feature Info options:

 Harness information from the main window — On the Model tab, click Harness from the Info
group in the ribbon. The following types of Harness information are available from the main
window:
o 2D-3D Info – Enables you to select a location in the main window, and the same location
highlights in the 3-D sub window.

o Wire List – Generates a wire list in the text window.

Figure 3 – View the Wire List

o Branch Info – Displays wire names, gauge, and thickness.

o Component – Displays parameters for the selected connector component.

Figure 1 – Viewing Component Information


o Flat Status – Grays out all flattened segments in the 3-D sub window, leaving still
unflattened segments in color. You can then flatten these remaining segments.

Figure 2 – Viewing Flat Status

 Feature information from the main window — On the Tools tab in the ribbon,
click Feature from the Investigate group and then select a harness feature. In the Cabling
Data section, the following types of information are available for a location:
o Location type (On Surface, On Axis, and so on)

o List of wires/cables passing through the location


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Information folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. View information about a wiring harness.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the ribbon, click Harness from the Info group in the Model tab.
4. Click 2D-3D Info from the menu manager.
5. Ensure both the main window and sub window are visible.

6. Select a location in the main window.

Figure 1
7. Notice the highlighting in the sub window.

Figure 2
8. Click Wire List from the menu manager.
9. View the contents of the information window.
 Click Close.

Figure 3
10. Click Branch Info from the menu manager.
11. Press CTRL and select the two location points.

Figure 4
12. View the contents of the information window.

 Click Close.

Figure 5
13. Click Component in the menu manager.
14. Select the middle connector, and click Yes from the Confirmation dialog box.
15. View the contents of the Information dialog box.
 Click Close.

Figure 6
16. Click Flat Status from the menu manager.
17. Notice the remaining unflattened segments that display in color (red and white in this case), while the
rest of the harness appears grayed out.

Figure 7
18. There are no wires connecting these locations in the main window.
Figure 8
19. Click Done/Exit from the menu manager.
20. In the ribbon, select the Tools tab. Click Feature from the Investigate group.
21. Select the location.

Figure 9
22. View the contents of the Feature information page.
Figure 10
23. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Closing Loops
Closing Loops
It is common to generate triangular loops when routing a 3-D harness. You can use the close loop
function to flatten the remaining wires, thereby closing the loop. If the loop will not close due to
insufficient wire lengths, you can try either of the following:

 Change the angle of the segment by moving it. This creates a smaller gap for the loop to close.

Figure 1 – Viewing Loop to Be Closed

 Increase the wire lengths in the 3-D model and regenerate the wire harness.
Figure 2 – Viewing the Loop in the 3-D Harness

To reduce the number of loops in the 3-D harness, create T-shaped branch bundles. These can help
eliminate the loop before creating the flattened harness.

Figure 3 – Viewing the Closed Loop


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Close-Loops folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM .

1. Task 1. Close an open loop in the harness.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Lay Out > Close Loop.
4. Press CTRL and select the two location points.

Figure 1
5. Notice that the loop closes.
Figure 2
 You can select the locations to close either from the main window or from the sub window.

6. Click Done/Quit.
7. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Investigating Additional Flatten
Features
Investigating Additional Flatten Features
You can create additional features in the flattened model, including Break, Bend, and Twist.

 Break – Enables you to shorten a long portion of a segment by removing length. The break is
indicated by an “X” symbol, and contains a dimension that can be modified or displayed in a
drawing. You can either insert or delete breaks.

Figure 1 – Viewing a Created Break

 Bend – Enables you to create a bend in an otherwise flat segment. You can specify a bend
radius and bend angle, and you can then drag the segment at this created bend. You can either
insert or delete bends.

Figure 2 – Viewing a Created Bend

 Twist – Enables you to select an existing bend and rotate the flattened segments out of the
flattening plane. For example, segments are typically flattened in only the FRONT plane, but you
could create a twist feature that rotates some segments into the TOP view plane, or multiple
planes. You can add or remove twists.

Figure 3 – Viewing a Created Twist


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Flat-Harness_Features folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click FLAT_HARN2.ASM .

1. Task 1. Insert a break on FLAT_HARN2.ASM.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To be able to view light cables more easily, change to the dark background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Dark
Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Break > Insert.
4. Select the main segment, to the left of center.

Figure 1
5. Type 25 and press ENTER.
6. Click Done/Quit.
7. In the menu manager, click Modify.
8. Select the main segment.

9. Edit the 25 dimension to 75.

Figure 2
10. Click Regenerate > Automatic from the menu manager.

Figure 3
11. Click File > Close.
1. Task 2. Insert a bend and twist on FLAT_HARN1.ASM.
1. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar.
2. Double-click FLAT_HARN1.ASM.

3. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

4. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Bend > Insert.


5. Select the segment location at its approximate center.

Figure 4
6. Type 2 as the bend radius and press ENTER.
7. Type 20 as the angle and press ENTER.

Figure 5
8. Click Done/Quit from the menu manager.
9. In the menu manager, click Flatten > Twist > Add.
10. Zoom in and select the curved part of the bend.
Figure 6

Figure 7
11. Type 90 as the twist angle and press ENTER.
12. Orient to the TOP view orientation.

Figure 8
13. To be able to view the 3D model more easily, change to the default background color:

 In the main window, click File > Options. Select System Colors and then select Default as the
Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Documenting Harness Designs
Module Overview:
You can create drawings with views that represent the footprint for laying out wires, cables, and
bundles. Drawings can be used to document interconnections between components, provide material
lists, and list electrical information needed to manufacture harnesses. Information documented in
drawings is dynamically linked to the harness design. Modifications to the harness are automatically
updated in drawing views and tables.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Create cabling assembly views.

 Create harness views.

 Create harness report tables.

 Place harness and spool BOM tables.

 Place connector pinout tables.

 Place harness From-To tables.

 Show cabling detail items.


Concept: Creating Cabling Assembly Views
Creating Cabling Assembly Views
Most companies document their assemblies by creating 2-D drawings. You can also create drawings
to document cabling assemblies. The following are some of the key items to consider when
documenting your cabling assemblies:

 Assembly views – You can place a view of the top-level assembly model to display how it looks.
You can also create views of only the cabling assembly. Typically you would create a view
displaying all harnesses, as well as views for each individual harness.

 Simplified representations – You can utilize any simplified representations that were created in
the assembly. For example, you can create a view of the top-level simplified representation, to
easily view the cabling inside its enclosure. You can also create views of simplified
representations in the cabling assembly for the individual harnesses.

 Drawing models – Before placing views in the drawing, ensure you have properly set the desired
drawing model. For example, to place the desired views you may have to set the top-level
assembly as the drawing model, as well as the cabling subassembly.
Figure 1 – Cabling Drawing

 Drawing view display options – The following drawing view display options are useful for cabling:

o View display style – Views can be set to either Shading or No Hidden.

o Skeleton model display – You can specify whether to show or hide the skeleton model in
the view.

o Cable display – You can specify the display of cables in the view as thick or thin.

o Colors come from – You can specify whether the colors in the view come from the drawing
or from the model.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Views_Assembly folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 1. Create a drawing for the cabling assembly and place views.
1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To view light cables more easily, use the dark background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and click OK.
3. In the ribbon, select the Applications tab.
4. Click Cabling from the Engineering group.
5. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .

6. Click View Manager from the In Graphics toolbar and select the Simp Rep tab.
 Double-click the Harn_1 representation.

Figure 1
7. Double-click the Harn_2 representation.

Figure 2
8. Double-click the Master Rep representation.
 Click Close.
9. Click Close .
10. Click Open from the Quick Access toolbar and double-click PANEL.ASM.
11. Click View Manager and double-click the Cabling representation.
Figure 3
12. Click Close .
13. Click New from the Quick Access toolbar, select Drawing as the Type, and type panel_cabling as
the Name.
 Click OK.
14. In the New Drawing dialog box, select Empty with format and click Browse.
 Click Working Directory and double-click C_FORMAT_GENERIC.FRM.
 Click OK.
15. In the Open Rep dialog box, ensure Cabling is selected and click OK.
16. Type your first initial, followed by your surname, and press ENTER.

Figure 4
17. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
18. Ensure No Combined State is selected, select the Do not prompt for Combined State check box,
and click OK.
19. Click in the upper-left area of the drawing to place the view.

20. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 0.75 and click Apply.
 Select the View States category and specify CABLING from the Simplified representation drop-
down list.

 Click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select Shading from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display and click OK.
21. Right-click in the graphics window and select Lock View Movement to toggle it off.
22. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 5
23. Click Drawing Models from the Model Views group of the Layout tab.
24. In the menu manager, click Add Model.
25. Select CABLING.ASM and click Open.
26. Ensure Master Rep is selected and click OK.
27. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
28. Click in the lower-left area of the drawing to place the view.

29. In the Drawing View dialog box, select TOP as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 0.75 and click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
30. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 6
31. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
32. Click in the upper-right area of the drawing to place the view.
33. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 0.75 and click Apply.
 Select the View States category and specify HARN_1 from the Simplified representation drop-
down list.

 Click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
34. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 7
35. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
36. Click in the lower-right area of the drawing to place the view.

37. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 0.75 and click Apply.
 Select the View States category and specify HARN_2 from the Simplified representation drop-
down list.

 Click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
38. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.
Figure 8
39. To view the 3-D model more easily, use the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Harness Views
Creating Harness Views
When documenting a cabling assembly within a drawing, you typically create views of the harnesses.

Figure 1 – Views of Harness 1


The following are some of the key items to consider when documenting your cabling harnesses:
 Flat harness – Typically you would create a view displaying the flat harness assembly model with
connectors.

 Extracted 3-D harness – You would also typically create a view of the extracted 3-D harness.
Figure 2 – Views of Harness 2

This model is the part model that displays without the connectors.
 Drawing models – Before placing views in the drawing, ensure you have properly set the desired
drawing model. For example, to place the desired views you may have to set the harness part
model as the drawing model as well as the flat harness assembly, which is the sub-assembly
within the manufacturing assembly.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Views_Harness folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Create and place harness views for HARNESS_1.PRT.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To view light cables more easily, edit to the dark background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and
click OK.
3. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.
4. Right-click in the graphics window and select Drawing Models.
5. In the menu manager, click Add Model.
6. Select HARNESS_1.PRT and click Open.
7. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
8. Ensure No Combined State is selected, select the Do not prompt for Combined State check box,
and click OK.
9. Click in the drawing immediately to the left of the title block to place the view.

10. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 1.0 and click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
11. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 1
12. Right-click in the graphics window and select Drawing Models.
13. In the menu manager, click Add Model.
14. Select FLAT_HARN1.ASM and click Open.
15. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
16. Click in the center area of the drawing to place the view.

17. In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 1.0 and click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
18. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 2
1. Task 2. Create and place harness views for HARNESS_2.PRT.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. Right-click in the graphics window and select Drawing Models.
3. In the menu manager, click Add Model.
4. Select HARNESS_2.PRT and click Open.
5. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
6. Click in the drawing immediately to the left of the title block to place the view.

7. In the Drawing View dialog box, select Default Orientation as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 1.0 and click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
8. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.
Figure 3
9. Right-click in the graphics window and select Drawing Models.
10. In the menu manager, click Add Model.
11. Select FLAT_HARN2.ASM and click Open.
12. In the graphics window, right-click and select Insert General View.
13. Click in the center area of the drawing to place the view.

14. In the Drawing View dialog box, select FRONT as the Model view name and click Apply.
 Select the Scale category and select Custom scale.
 Edit the value to 1.0 and click Apply.
 Select the View Display category and select No Hidden from the Display style drop-down list.
 Select Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Select Thick for Cable display.
 Select The model for Colors come from and click OK.
15. Select and drag the view as necessary. Then, click to de-select the view.

Figure 4
16. To view the 3D model more easily, edit to the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Creating Harness Report Tables
Creating Harness Report Tables
You can create harness report tables to clearly display important cabling information including spool
names, wire and cable lists, pin names, and so on. To create the harness report table, you must first
create the table and specify the number of columns and their widths, as well as the number of rows
and their heights. Next, you must type in text for the column titles.

Figure 1 – Created Table

Creating the Repeat Region


Next, you must create the repeat region and specify the many parameters in the region. Repeat
regions auto-populate to extract information from the active model, depending on the parameter being
used. Creo/REPORT parameters enable you to extract and document electrical parameter values and
connection information from the harness assembly. For example, you can list spool names, colors,
lengths, connector from and to information, and pinout information for connectors. You can also
create tables containing various report parameters. The tables are dynamically linked to the harness
design and automatically update based on changes in connectors and parameter values. You can
create any type of table to report the required information.

Figure 2 – Table with Repeat Region Parameters Filled In

Examples of repeat region parameters include:

 &harn.spool.name – Lists the names of all wire and cable spools used in a harness.

 &harn.run.name – Lists the names of cables, wires, and bundles used in a harness.

 &harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.name – Lists pin names from and to which every wire and cable
conductor is routed.

The following repeat region tools can help you to further customize the report table:

 Filters – Enables you to remove selected rows, as well as remove a number of rows based on a
specified rule. For example, the following rule filters out any items starting with the letter B, such
as all bundles:

o &harn.run.name != B*

 Sort – Enables you to sort a selected column forward or backward.


Saving Report Tables
You can save commonly used tables as a *.tbl file for easy import into your drawings. This enables
you to create customized tables that you use often.

Electrical Report Parameters


Category Parameter Description
Wire/ Cable Run &harn.run.name Lists the name of a cable,
wire, or bundle (for example,
wire01).
&harn.run.len Lists the length of a cable,
wire, or bundle. This value
includes the length inside
connectors.
&harn.run.from/to.conn.name Lists connector reference
designators to and from
which every wire and cable
are routed.
&harn.run.from/to.conn.User Defined Displays user-defined
parameters listed in the
connector parameter files to
and from which wires and
cables are routed.
&harn.run.cond.name Lists every routed wire and
cable conductor in the
harness.
&harn.run.cond.color Lists the color of every routed
wire and cable in the
harness.
&harn.run.cond.User Defined Lists specified user-defined
parameters for every wire
and cable conductor in the
harness.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.conn.name Lists connector reference
designators to and from
which every wire and cable
conductor is routed.
&harn.run.cond.spool. User Defined Lists specified user-defined
spool parameters for every
wire and cable conductor.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.name Lists pin names to and from
which every wire and cable
conductor is routed.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.sig.name Lists pin signal names for
every wire and cable
conductor.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.sig.type Lists signal type of from and
to conductor (for example,
0V).
&harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.sig.User Lists specified user-defined
Defined pin parameters for every wire
and cable conductor.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.pin.entry_port Lists pin entry ports for every
wire and cable conductor.
Category Parameter Description
&harn.run.cond.from/to.strip.len Lists the strip length of every
wire and cable conductor.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.term.name Lists terminator names for
every wire and cable
conductor.
&harn.run.cond.from/to.conn.User Lists specified user-defined
Defined connector parameters for
specified wire and cable
conductors.
&harn.run.User Defined Displays user-defined
parameters listed in the
routed wire or cable
parameter files of the
harness model.
&harn.run.spool.name Lists spool names (for
example, Spool_1).
&harn.run.spool.User Defined Lists user or system-defined
spool parameters, where
“User Defined” is the spool
parameter. For example,
&harn.run.spool.cost would
display the cost parameter if
it is defined in the spool
parameters.
Spool &harn.spool.name Lists all defined spool names
for every cable and wire used
in the model.
&harn.spool.len Lists the total routed length of
every spool used in the
model.
&harn.spool.User Defined Lists specified user-defined
attributes for every spool
used in the model.
Connector &asm.mbr.connprm.name Lists the reference
designators of connectors in
the assembly.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.name Lists the names of pins for
each connector in the
assembly.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.color Lists the color of wires and
conductors connected to
each connector pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.name Lists the name of the
conductors and wires
connected to each pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.strip.len Lists the strip length of wires
and conductors attached to
each pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.User Lists the specified user-
Defined defined parameters in
conductors or wires
connected to each pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.len Lists the length of wires and
Category Parameter Description
cables connected to each
pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.name Lists the names of wires,
cables, or bundles connected
to each connector pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.spool.name Lists the spool names of
wires and cables connected
to each connector pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.spool.User Lists the specified user-
Defined defined spools of wires and
cables connected to each
pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.run.User Defined Lists the specified user-
defined parameters for wires
and cables connected to
each pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.signal.name Lists the signal name of each
pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.signal.type Lists the signal type of each
pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.term.name Lists the terminator name of
each pin.
&asm.mbr.connprm.User Defined Lists the value of the
specified user-defined
parameter for each
connector.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.entry_port Lists the entry port parameter
of each pin for each
connector.
&asm.mbr.connprm.pin.signal.User Lists the specified user-
Defined defined parameter for each
pin.
Miscellaneous &harn.run.subharn.name Lists subharness names
used.
&asm.mbr.cblprm.User Defined Lists specified user-defined
parameters in the cabling
components.
&asm.mbr.cblprms.name Lists names of all user-
defined parameters in the
cabling components.
&asm.mbr.cblprms.value Lists values of all user-
defined parameters in the
cabling components.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Tables_Creating folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click TABLE.DRW.

1. Task 1. Create the harness report table.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.


3. In the Table group, click Table , move the cursor to highlight a 9X2 grid, and click to select it.
 Click in the upper-left area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 1
4. To specify the width of the first column and the height of both rows, press CTRL and select the top-left
cell and the bottom-left cell.

 Right-click and select Height and Width.


 Ensure Automatic height adjustment is cleared.

 Type 2 for the Height in number of characters.


 Type 10 for the Width in number of characters and click OK.
5. Click after the corresponding columns to specify the following widths for columns 2 through 9,
respectively: 10, 18, 5, 18, 5, 12, 8, and 8.

Figure 2
6. Double-click the upper-left cell, type RUN, and click OK.
 Working from left to right, add the following text to columns 2 through 9,
respectively: COND, FROM CONN, FROM PIN, TO CONN, TO PIN, SPOOL, COLOR,
and RUN LENGTH.
 For cells that have two rows of text, press ENTER to start typing text in the next row.
Figure 3
7. Select the first table row and click Text Style from the Format group.
8. In the Text Style dialog box, select Center from the Horizontal drop-down list and select Middle from
the Vertical drop-down list.
 Click OK.

Figure 4
1. Task 2. Create the table repeat region and save the table.
1. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
2. In the menu manager, click Add.
3. In the second table row, select the far-left cell, followed by the far-right cell and click Done from the
menu manager.
4. Click Switch Symbols from the Data group to view the region.
5. Click Switch Symbols again.

Figure 5
6. Double-click the table cell under the RUN cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > name.

Figure 6
7. Double-click the table cell under the COND cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > cond > name.

Figure 7
8. Double-click the table cell under the FROM CONN cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > cond > from > conn > name.
Figure 8
9. Double-click the table cell under the FROM PIN cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > cond > from > pin > name.

Figure 9
10. Double-click the table cell under the TO CONN cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > cond > to > conn > name.

Figure 10
11. Double-click the table cell under the TO PIN cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > cond > to > pin > name.

Figure 11
12. Double-click the table cell under the SPOOL cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > spool > name.

Figure 12
13. Double-click the table cell under the COLOR cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > spool > User Defined.
 Type COLOR and press ENTER.
Figure 13
14. Double-click the table cell under the RUN LENGTH cell.

 In the Report Symbol dialog box, click harn > run > len.
15. Select the same cell, right-click, and select Properties.
16. In the Note Properties dialog box, type [.2] after the parameter text to limit the value to 2 decimal
places.
 Click OK.

Figure 14
17. Click in the background to de-select all cells.

18. Select the entire table.

19. Select Save As Table from the Save Table types drop-down list in the Table group.
20. Type harn_from-to.tbl as the Name and click Save.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Placing Harness BOM Tables
Placing Harness BOM Tables
Harness Bill of Materials (BOM) tables can list the names and quantities of connectors and
components such as wire ties used in the harness. Once the harness BOM table is created, BOM
balloons can be shown to reference the connectors in the drawing view to the index in the table.

Figure 1 – Viewing a Placed BOM Table


You can create a BOM table and save it as a *.tbl file for reuse. Before importing the table from file,
set the proper active model. The table automatically propagates.
The BOM table uses the following repeat region parameters:

 INDEX: &rpt.index

 NAME: &asm.mbr.name

 QTY: &rpt.qty
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Tables_BOM folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Place the BOM table for FLAT_HARN1.ASM.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.


3. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN1.ASM > Master Rep.
4. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.
5. Click Table From File from the Table group.
6. In the Open dialog box, select harn_bom.tbl and click Open.
7. Click in the upper-right area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 1
8. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
9. In the menu manager, click Attributes.
10. Select the repeat region in the graphics window.

11. In the menu manager, click Flat > Done/Return > Done.

Figure 2
1. Task 2. Place the BOM table for FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN2.ASM > Master Rep.
3. Click Table From File from the Table group.
4. In the Open dialog box, select harn_bom.tbl and click Open.
5. Click in the upper-right area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 3
6. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
7. In the menu manager, click Attributes.
8. Select the repeat region in the graphics window.

9. In the menu manager, click Flat > Done/Return > Done.

Figure 4
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Placing Connector Pinout Tables
Placing Connector Pinout Tables
Connector pinout tables can be created to list the connector designation and component name. They
can also list connectivity information, such as the conductor name and color for each pin. Once
placed, the tables must be assigned to a particular connector to list that connector's information. To
do this, click Repeat Region from the Drawing ribbon, click Model/Rep from the menu manager,
and then select the region and the desired connector. The table updates to display information
specific to the selected connector. In Figures 1, 2, and 3, the same table was used to display the
unique information of each connector.

Figure 1 – M-02 Connector Pinout Table

Figure 2 – C-02 Connector Pinout Table

Figure 3 – C-01 Connector Pinout Table


The pinout table uses the following repeat region parameters:

 NAME: &mbr.connprm.name [mbr.name]

 PIN: &mbr.connprm.pin.name

 COND: &mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.name

 COLOR: &mbr.connprm.pin.run.cond.color

If cables are manually routed, the pinout information must be manually specified for each
connector before it displays in the connector pinout table. To define pin information for a
connector, the NUM_OF_PINS parameter must first be added to the connector's Cabling
Parameters and specified. Next, you can select the Pins option in the Electrical Parameter dialog
box and specify both the correct CABLE_NAME and ENTRY_PORT parameter values.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Tables_Pinout folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Place the connector pinout tables for FLAT_HARN1.ASM.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To view light cables more easily, edit to the dark background color:

Click File > Options.


Select the System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and
click OK.
3. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.
4. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN1.ASM > Master Rep.
5. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.
6. Click Table From File from the Table group.
7. In the Open dialog box, select conn_pin-out.tbl and click Open.
8. Click to the right of the upper connector to place the table.

Figure 1
9. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
10. In the menu manager, click Model/Rep.
11. Select the first row of the table in the graphics window.

12. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm.


13. Click Model/Rep again and select the third row of the table.
14. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm > Done.
Figure 2
15. Select the upper table cell and click Height and Width from the Rows & Columns group.
16. Edit the column width to 5 and click OK.
17. Click in the background to de-select the table.

Figure 3
18. Select the entire table, right-click, and select Copy.
19. Click in the background to de-select the table.

20. Right-click and select Paste.


21. In the clipboard, click the lower-left corner of the table.

22. In the graphics window, click to the right of the right connector to paste the copied table.

23. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.


24. In the menu manager, click Model/Rep.
25. Select the first row of the table in the graphics window.

26. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm.


27. Click Model/Rep again and select the third row of the table.
28. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm > Done.

Figure 4
29. Select the entire table, right-click, and select Copy.
30. Click in the background to de-select the table.

31. Right-click and select Paste.


32. In the clipboard, click the lower-left corner of the table.

33. In the graphics window, click to the left of the left connector to paste the copied table.

34. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.


35. In the menu manager, click Model/Rep.
36. Select the first row of the table in the graphics window.

37. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm.


38. Click Model/Rep again and select the third row of the table.
39. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm > Done.
Figure 5
1. Task 2. Place the connector pinout tables for FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN2.ASM > Master Rep.
3. Click Table From File from the Table group.
4. In the Open dialog box, select conn_pin-out.tbl and click Open.
5. Click to the right of the right connector to place the table.

Figure 6
6. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.
7. In the menu manager, click Model/Rep.
8. Select the first row of the table in the graphics window.

9. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm.


10. Click Model/Rep again and select the third row of the table.
11. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm > Done.
Figure 7
 The shield wire SW-1 was not routed in this version of the model.

12. Select the entire table, right-click, and select Copy.


13. Click in the background to de-select the table.

14. Right-click and select Paste.


15. In the clipboard, click the lower-left corner of the table.

16. In the graphics window, click to the left of the left connector to paste the copied table.

17. Click Repeat Region from the Data group.


18. In the menu manager, click Model/Rep.
19. Select the first row of the table in the graphics window.

20. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm.


21. Click Model/Rep again and select the third row of the table.
22. Select the adjacent connector and click Confirm > Done.

Figure 8
23. To view the 3D model more easily, edit to the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Placing Spool BOM Tables
Placing Spool BOM Tables
Spool Bill of Materials (BOM) tables can be created to list the names of each spool used in the
harness.

Figure 1 – Spool BOM Table


Colors and actual usage lengths for each wire can be listed. You can create a spool BOM table and
save it as a *.tbl file for reuse.
The Spool BOM Table lists total lengths required from each spool of wire. It uses the following
repeat region parameters:

 SPOOL: &harn.spool.name

 COLOR: &harn.spool.color

 LENGTH: &harn.spool.len[.1]

The [.1] dictates the number of decimal places displayed in the table.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Tables_Spool folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Place the spool BOM tables for FLAT_HARN1.ASM.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To view light cables more easily, edit to the dark background color:

Click File > Options.


Select the System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and
click OK.
3. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.
4. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN1.ASM > Master Rep.
5. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.
6. Click Table From File from the Table group.
7. In the Open dialog box, select spool_bom.tbl and click Open.
8. Click to the lower-left area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 1
1. Task 2. Place the spool BOM tables for FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN2.ASM > Master Rep.
3. Click Table From File from the Table group.
4. In the Open dialog box, select spool_bom.tbl and click Open.
5. Click to the lower-left area of the drawing to place the table.
Figure 2
6. To view the 3D model more easily, edit to the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Concept: Placing Harness From and To Tables
Placing Harness From and To Tables
Harness From and To tables can be created to display a variety of connectivity information. From and
To details can be listed for each pin on each connector in the harness. You can create a harness
From and To table and save it as a *.tbl file for reuse.

Figure 1 – Harness From and To Table

The Harness From and To table lists connectivity and other general information for each wire and
cable. It uses the following repeat region parameters:

 RUN: &harn.run.name

 COND: &harn.run.cond.name

 FROM CONN: &harn.run.cond.from.conn.name

 FROM PIN: &harn.run.cond.from.pin.name

 TO CONN: &harn.run.cond.to.conn.name

 TO PIN: &harn.run.cond.to.pin.name

 SPOOL: &harn.run.spool.name

 COLOR: &harn.run.color.name

 RUN LENGTH: &harn.run.len[.2]

The [.2] dictates the number of decimal places displayed in the table.
Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Tables_From-To folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Place the From and To table for FLAT_HARN1.ASM.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.


3. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN1.ASM > Master Rep.
4. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.
5. Click Table From File from the Table group.
6. In the Open dialog box, select harn_from-to.tbl and click Open.
7. Click to the upper-left area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 1
1. Task 2. Place the From and To table for FLAT_HARN2.ASM.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. In the model tree, click Set Active Model/Rep and select FLAT_HARN2.ASM > Master Rep.
3. Click Table From File from the Table group.
4. In the Open dialog box, select harn_from-to.tbl and click Open.
5. Click to the upper-left area of the drawing to place the table.

Figure 2
 The shield wire SW-1 was not routed in this version of the model. Therefore, its From and To cells
are blank.

This completes the procedure.


Concept: Showing Cabling Detail Items
Showing Cabling Detail Items
When creating a 2-D cabling drawing, you can select which information from the 3-D models to show
in the drawing:

 Dimensions – You can show dimensions that update to reflect modifications in the 3-D routing or
2-D flattened harness models. The following types of dimensions can be shown:

o Lengths – You cannot modify lengths from the drawing. These dimensions are driven by the
routing.

o Angles – You can modify angles from the drawing.

o Radii – You can modify radius values from the drawing.

 Notes – Enable you to show reference designators. In certain circumstances, you must manually
create any leaders to any designated assembly models.

Figure 1 – Viewing Shown Notes

 Balloons – Correspond to the harness BOM index numbers displayed in the corresponding BOM
table.

Figure 2 – Viewing Shown Dimensions and Balloons


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Cabling\Showing_Details folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click PANEL_CABLING.DRW.

1. Task 1. Show the notes for the drawing harnesses in sheet 1.


1. Disable all Datum Display types.

2. To view light cables more easily, use the dark background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and click OK.
3. Select the Annotate tab from the ribbon.
4. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
5. In the Show Model Annotations dialog box, select Note Tab .
6. Select the drawing view.

Figure 1
7. In the Notes tab, select the check boxes for notes Note_13, Note_15, and Note_17.
 Click OK.
8. Move the notes as necessary.

Figure 2
9. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
10. Select the drawing view.

Figure 3
11. In the Notes tab, select the check boxes for notes Note_16 and Note_18.
 Click OK.
12. Move the notes as necessary.

Figure 4
1. Task 2. Show dimensions and BOM balloons in sheet 2.
1. Select the Sheet 2 sheet tab to activate it.
2. Click Show Model Annotations from the Annotations group.
3. In the Show Model Annotations dialog box, select Dimensions Tab .
4. Select the drawing view.
Figure 5

5. On the Dimensions tab, click Select All .


 Click OK.
6. Move the dimensions as shown.

7. Flip the arrows for both 20° dimensions and the 10 dimension.

Figure 6
8. Press CTRL and select all the 2 dimensions, except for the two shown.
9. Right-click and select Erase.
10. Erase the four 0° angle dimensions along the harness trunk.

Figure 7
11. Select the Table tab from the ribbon.
12. Select Create Balloons - All from the Create Balloons types drop-down menu.
13. Select the region in the table in the upper-right corner.

14. Select Create Balloons - By View from the Create Balloons types drop-down menu.
15. Select the region in the table in the upper-right corner and select the upper view.

 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.


16. Move the three balloons as necessary.

Figure 8
1. Task 3. Show BOM balloons in sheet 3.
1. Select the Sheet 3 sheet tab to activate it.
2. Select Create Balloons - By View from the Create Balloons types drop-down menu, and select the
region in the table in the upper-right corner.
3. Select the upper view.

4. Select Create Balloons - By View again, select the region in the table in the upper-right corner
again, and select the upper view again.
 Click OK in the Warning dialog box.
5. Move the two balloons as necessary.

Figure 9
6. To view the 3-D model more easily, use the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select System Colors and then select Default as the Color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the procedure.
Project (Creo Schematics-Based)
Module Overview:
Using Creo Parametric and the skills learned in this course, complete the following project design
tasks.

Objectives:
After successfully completing this module, you will be able to:

 Set up for cabling.

 Route wires and cables.

 Modify wires and cable routing.

 Flatten the harness.

 Create a harness drawing.


Concept: The Electrical Cabinet
Project Scenario
Piping and Cabling Systems Incorporated (PCSI) is a supplier of fluid and gas piping systems to many
industries. They design and manufacture fluid and gas piping systems, including the associated
electrical control and cabling systems.

You work in a cross-functional team of engineers involved in the design of electrical harness systems.
You are working on a new manifold piping system, which involves the design of wiring diagrams and
the design of associated electrical harness designs that form part of the manifold control panel. This
project takes you through the activities associated with the development of the wiring diagram and the
design of the electrical harness.

Figure 1 – Electrical Cabinet with Wiring Harness


Minimal Instructions
Because all tasks in this project are based on topics that you have learned throughout this course,
instructions for each project step are minimal. There are no step-by-step "picks and clicks" given. This
provides you with a chance to test your knowledge of the materials as you proceed though the
project.

Completed Models for Reference


Be sure to save all project models within the Projects classroom folder structure. The projects folder
also contains sub-folders named Cabling_Schematics-2, Cabling_Schematics-
3, Cabling_Schematics-4,Cabling_Schematics-5, and completed_Schematics. In the
four Cabling_Schematics-X folders, you will find a version of each model as is needed to begin that
objective number. You can use these models to begin a given objective, if needed. In
the completed_Schematics folder, you will find a completed version of each model at the conclusion
of the project. Again, these completed models can be used as reference, if required.
Concept: Set Up for Cabling
Set Up for Cabling
In this step of the project, you first review the completed Creo Schematics Lite wiring diagram and
export an XML file.

Figure 1 – Creo Schematics Lite Wiring Diagram


You then create the cabling assembly structure and assemble the connectors and components into it.
Next, you establish the logical references in the assembly by importing the XML file from Creo
Schematics Lite. Finally, you create the harness part.

Figure 2 – Logical Reference Designators Defined


Procedure Setup:
1. To avoid naming conflicts, it is recommended you save your work, click File > Close until no models
display, then click File > Manage Session > Erase Not Displayed.
2. Click File > Manage Session > Set Working Directory and navigate to
the PTCU\CreoParametric2\Projects\Cabling_Schematics-1 folder and click OK
3. Click File > Open and double-click ELEC_CABINET.ASM.
Scenario
Piping and Cabling Systems Incorporated (PCSI) is a supplier of fluid and gas piping systems to many
industries. They design and manufacture fluid and gas piping systems, including the associated
electrical control and cabling systems.

You work in a cross-functional team of engineers involved in the design of electrical harness systems.
You are working on a new manifold piping system, which involves the design of wiring diagrams and
the design of associated electrical harness designs that form part of the manifold control panel. This
project takes you through the activities associated with the development of the wiring diagram and the
design of the electrical harness.

1. Task 1. Inspect the electrical cabinet assembly.


1. Enable only the following Datum Display types: .

2. Notice the electrical control modules and meters inside the electrical cabinet.

3. Notice the red emergency button on the cabinet exterior, as well as the red, yellow, and green lights.

Figure 1
4. Minimize the Creo Parametric application.

1. Task 2. Investigate the completed Creo Schematics Lite wiring diagram and export
the XML file.
1. Launch the Creo Schematics Lite application and open the CABINET design from
the Projects directory.
 In this course, we only use Creo Schematics Lite. The files for this project are set up to use this
version of the software. The advanced version of Creo Schematics is not required.

2. Investigate the wiring components and view each reference designator.

3. Investigate all wires, viewing each wire name.


Figure 2
4. Export the design to an XML file.

Figure 3

Figure 4

 Name the file CABINET.XML and export it to the Projects\XML folder.
 Select the Pro/CABLING option and clear the Pre Wildfire 3.0 check box.
 Select the Current sheet option.
5. Minimize the Creo Schematics Lite application.

1. Task 3. Create the cabling assembly structure.


1. Maximize the Creo Parametric application.

2. From the view manager, activate the Cabling simplified representation.


3. Orient to the 3D_Cabinet view orientation.
Figure 5
4. Create a new sub-assembly named CABLING.ASM using template file MM_KG_SEC_ASSY.ASM.

Figure 6
 Assemble the CABLING.ASM sub-assembly using the Default constraint.
5. Activate CABLING.ASM and create a skeleton model named CABLING_SKEL.PRT using the
MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT template file.
Figure 7
6. Activate the CABLING_SKEL.PRT and insert a shrinkwrap feature.

Figure 8

 Set the referencing type icon to External and accept the Default Placement.
7. Specify datum coordinate systems PWR, MOUNT_5, MOUNT_2, and all eight of the submodel
COMP* coordinate systems as datum references.

 Do NOT complete the shrinkwrap feature yet.

8. Continue the shrinkwrap definition by specifying the three ROUTE datum axes as references, as
shown.
Figure 9
9. Edit the shrinkwrap Quality Level to 6.
10. Ignore the CABLING.ASM assembly in the shrinkwrap feature by disabling the subset option for
CABLING.ASM.

Figure 10
11. Complete the shrinkwrap feature.

 Click Subset from the dashboard and clear the CABLING.ASM check box.
12. Open the CABLING.ASM file in the Master Rep, expand the skeleton model, and hide the eight
datum features in the model.
13. Orient the model as shown and create a view orientation named 3D_1.

Figure 11
14. Orient the model as shown and create a view orientation named 3D_2.

Figure 12
15. Create a new layer named CSYS_ASSY-REF.

16. Include coordinate system PWR on the layer.

 Click New Layer to place the external item on a new layer.


17. Expand layer CSYS_ASSY-REF and add the remaining ten visible coordinate systems to the IN
CABLING_SKEL.PRT sublayer.
Figure 13
18. Create a new layer named AXES_ROUTING.

19. Add datum axis ROUTE to the layer.

 Click New Layer before placing the external item.


20. Add axes ROUTE_1 and ROUTE_2 to the layer.

 Select the existing layer AXES_ROUTING for each and place the item.

21. Hide the AXES_ROUTING layer.

Figure 14
 Be careful to add the datum axes to the layer, not the datum axis tags.

1. Task 4. Assemble the connectors and components to the cabling assembly.


1. Assemble the POWER_BOX.ASM assembly to the PWR coordinate system.

2. Assemble the RELAY.ASM to the MOUNT_5 and MOUNT_2 coordinate systems, respectively.
Figure 15
 Right-click and select New Location to place multiple instances of a component.
3. Assemble the CONN_2_L.PRT to the three coordinate systems under the green, amber, and red
lamps.

4. Assemble the CONN_5_EB.PRT to the coordinate system under the red emergency button switch.

Figure 16
5. Assemble the CONN_9_CM.PRT to the coordinate systems on the two green modules.

 When viewing the model in the 3D_2 view orientation, use New Location to assemble to the
green module on the left first, followed by the green module on the right.
6. Assemble the CONN_2_MS.PRT to the two coordinate systems on the sides of the brown manual
switch.
Figure 17
 When viewing the model in the 3D_2 view orientation, use New Location to assemble to the
coordinate system on the left first, followed by the coordinate system on the right.
7. Hide the CSYS_ASSY-REF layer.

8. Save the layer status.

1. Task 5. Establish the logical references.


1. With the CABLING.ASM assembly open, switch to the Cabling application.

2. Import the exported Creo Schematics cabinet.xml file created in the first task.

 The cabinet.xml file is located in the Projects\XML folder.

3. Compare logical references alphabetically and notice that the items from the schematic are not yet
present in the CABLING.ASM assembly.

Figure 18
4. Open the Auto Designator dialog box to designate the assembly member components as connectors.
5. Designate the CM-01 reference designator to the first (left) connector in the assembly, as shown.

Figure 19

Figure 20
6. Notice the CM-02 reference is now designated also, as it is no longer a multiple in the cabling
assembly.
Figure 21
 You must click Apply in the Auto Designator dialog box for the CM-02 reference to be designated.
7. Designate the L-01 reference to the connector under the red lamp.

8. Click Apply and notice there are still multiples for the L-02 and L-03 reference designators.
9. Designate the L-02 reference to the connector under the amber lamp.

10. Click Apply and notice the L-03 reference is now designated, as it is no longer a multiple.

Figure 22
 Remember to toggle Ref Designator Labels on to view the labels in the graphics window.
11. Designate the MS-1 reference to the first (left) connector, as shown.
Figure 23
12. Designate the RL-01 reference to the first instance of RELAY.ASM in the model tree.

 Click Apply in the Auto Designator dialog box to automatically designate the RL-02 connector.
 At this time, you have completed designating references.

13. Notice the reference designator labels for RL-01, RL-02, and PB-01 display at a default location
without leaders.

Figure 24
14. Move the reference designator labels to the approximate locations shown. Move the other reference
designator labels as desired.
Figure 25
 Edit the selection filter to Annotation, select a label, then right-click and select Move to move the
label.
 Leaders are not created for designated assembly connectors. You will create leaders for assembly
connectors later in the project on the drawing. If desired, you could delete the annotations and
create new ones with leaders.

15. In the model tree, add the Designation column from the Cable Info Type.
 Click Settings and select Tree Columns.
16. Notice that the designations for the components are now visible.

Figure 26
17. Update the logical reference information.

18. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically.

19. Scroll to the connector/component section and notice all are matched except for splices SP-01 and
SP-02.
Figure 27
1. Task 6. Create the harness part.
1. Create a harness named HARNESS_1.PRT using the MM_KG_SEC_PART.PRT template. The Type
should be Part, and the Sub-type should be Harness.
2. Hide the four datum features in the HARNESS_1.PRT.

3. Save the display status of the model and save the CABLING.ASM assembly.

This completes the exercise.


Concept: Routing Wires and Cables
Routing Wires and Cables
In this step of the project, you create the network and route the wires and cables.

Figure 1 – Creating the Network


First, you create the main portions of the network and the network branches. Next, you verify the
created network by checking for continuity and any overlapping locations.

Figure 2 – Verifying the Network


Next, you prepare for routing by moving reference designator tags, creating view orientations, and
loading the wire colors appearances. Finally, you route the wires and cables, and create the
necessary splices.
Figure 3 – Routing Wires and Cables
Throughout this step of the project, you review the logical references and update and compare
them.
1. Task 1. Create the main portions of the network.
1. Orient to the FRONT orientation.

2. Disable the display of reference designators.

Figure 1
3. Initiate the network routing.

 In the ribbon, click Route Network from the Route group to define the network.
4. Specify the first location point directly across from the fourth pin of the connector as shown.

Figure 2
5. Specify two more location points on the surface as shown.
Figure 3
6. Specify the fourth location point approximately as shown.

Figure 4
7. Force the segment to be parallel to the upper edge of the board. Specify the offset of the fourth
location point a distance of 165 from the third location point.
Figure 5
 Right-click and select Next Location > Use Direction and select the top of the board as the
reference.
8. Switch the active segment end and specify four more location points as shown. The fourth location
point should be parallel to the upper edge of the board, and offset a distance of 130 from the third
location point.

Figure 6
 Right-click and select Switch Ends.
9. Specify two more location points to close the loop as shown. The second location point should be the
other end of the segment. Complete the network segment.
Figure 7
10. Route another network segment.

11. Specify a series of eleven location points from the RELAY.ASM up towards the SW-01 component
using a combination of free locations and Use Direction as shown.

Figure 8
 Start on the left and work your way to the right.

1. Task 2. Create network branches.


1. Create a new connecting segment with three location points specified, as shown. The first and third
location points should coincide with the location points on the upper and lower segments.
Figure 9
2. Create a new connecting segment as shown.

Figure 10
3. Create the third connecting segment as shown.

Figure 11
4. Create three additional network segments as shown.

Figure 12
1. Task 3. Verify the created network.
1. Analyze the network for continuity.
Figure 13
2. Check the network to verify there are no overlapping locations found.

1. Task 4. Prepare to route the wires.


1. Enable the display of the reference designators.

2. Switch Creo Parametric to the Standard application.


3. Move the reference designators as necessary so they display as shown.

Figure 14
4. Switch back to the Cabling application.
5. Maximize Creo Schematics and review the completed diagram again.

6. Compare the reference designators from Creo Schematics and the CABLING.ASM.
Figure 15
7. Minimize the Creo Schematics window.

8. Use the Appearances Manager to load the wire_colors.dmt appearances file.

Figure 16
 Override all the existing appearances with the ones from this file.

 You must reload the color file again each time you start a new Creo Parametric session.

9. Unhide the CSYS_WIRE-PORTS layer.

1. Task 5. Route the W-13, W-14, and W-15 wires.


1. Review the routing of wires W-13, W-14, and W-15 in the wiring diagram.

Figure 17
2. Minimize the Creo Schematics window.

3. Begin routing cables.

4. Click Yes to designate components


5. Scroll to the bottom of the Auto Designator dialog box, and notice that there are missing splices. This
is what prompted the message.

Figure 18
6. Close the dialog box.

 In the future, you can skip this designation step.

7. Find the W-13, W-14, and W-15 wires to route them Via Network.

8. Notice that the wires do not pass through the first network location point, as shown.

Figure 19
9. Cancel the routing.

10. Select the first network location point in front of CM-01 and edit its Location Properties. Edit the
Priority to Required.
11. Start routing wires again.

12. Find the W-13, W-14, and W-15 wires to route them Via Network.

13. Notice that the wires now pass through the first network point location, as shown.
Figure 20
14. Complete the routing of the wires.

15. Edit the Location Properties of the first network location point again. Edit the Priority back to Primary.
16. Edit the view orientation to FRONT.

17. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: . Then review the cables.

Figure 21
18. Edit the cable display back to centerline display.

19. Open the CM-02 connector in a new window.

20. Unhide the ENTRY datum coordinate system at the bottom of the model tree.
Figure 22
21. Close the part to return to the assembly.

 The wires being routed to CM-01 use all of the individual coordinate systems on the connector,
while the wires being routed to CM-02 will all be routed to this single ENTRY coordinate system.
This is due to the different values set for the Entry_Port property in the Creo Schematics diagram.

 Normally it is quicker to route multiple wires to a single coordinate system on a connector. Multiple
coordinate systems should only be used if specifically required; for example, when precise wire
lengths are required.

1. Task 6. Route the CABLE_1_1 cable.


1. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

2. Disable the display of coordinate systems.

3. Review the routing of the cable in the wiring diagram.

Figure 23
4. Initiate the cable routing. Skip the logical references designation.

5. Find the CABLE_1_1 cable and route it Via Network as shown.


Figure 24
6. Edit the cable display to Thick Cables and review the cables.

Figure 25
7. Edit the cable display back to centerline display.

1. Task 7. Review logical references.


1. Update the logical reference information.

2. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically. Notice W-13, W-14, and W-15 are now
listed as matched.

3. Notice the CABLE_1_1 cable is now listed as matched.

4. Notice that the spools used to create the wires are listed as matched.

1. Task 8. Route the W-09, W-10, and W-11 wires.


1. Review the routing of wires W-09, W-10, and W-11 in the wiring diagram.
Figure 26
2. Route wires W-09, W-10, and W-11 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.

Figure 27
1. Task 9. Route the W-04, W-05, and W-06 wires.
1. Review the routing of wires W-04, W-05, and W-06 in the wiring diagram.
Figure 28
2. Route wires W-04, W-05, and W-06 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.

3. Highlight each wire in the Route cables dialog box.

4. Notice that only the W-05 wire routes Via Network, and the other two wires only display coordinate
system destinations as shown.

Figure 29
 Keep the Route cables dialog box open.

5. Unhide the AXES_ROUTING layer.

6. From the end of the existing upper-right network branch, route an additional network segment through
the three ROUTE datum axes as shown.
Figure 30
 Including the end of the existing branch, you will specify a total of four locations.

 Do not complete the network segment yet.

7. Orient to the LEFT view orientation.

8. Complete the network segment by specifying three additional locations as shown.

Figure 31
9. Notice that the W-05 wire now follows the new network segment as shown.
Figure 32
10. Apply the routing and notice that wires W-04 and W-06 display as “broken” in the model tree.

11. Select the W-04 and W-06 wires from the model tree and edit the Route Type to Simple Route.
12. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and notice that W-04 and W-06 cannot follow the defined
network because there is no tangent path from CM-02 to the lamps as shown.

Figure 33
 Leave the Route cables dialog box open.

13. Create a new network segment as shown.


Figure 34
14. Edit the Route Type back to Via Network and notice the new path as shown.

Figure 35
15. Complete the routing.

1. Task 10. Route the W-07, W-08, and W-12 wires.


1. Review the routing of wires W-07, W-08, and W-12 in the wiring diagram.

Figure 36
2. Route wires W-07, W-08, and W-12 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.

Figure 37
1. Task 11. Route the W-01, W-02, and W-03 wires.
1. Review the routing of wires W-01, W-02, and W-03 in the wiring diagram.

Figure 38
2. Route wires W-01, W-02, and W-03 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.
Figure 39
1. Task 12. Review logical references.
1. Update the logical reference information.

2. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically. Notice that all components are matched
except for wires W-16 – W-20, the splice components SP-01 and SP-02, and one spool
14_RED_SXL.

3. Save the CABLING.ASM assembly.

1. Task 13. Place a splice on an existing wire.


1. Review the routing of wires W-16 and W-18 in the wiring diagram.

Figure 40
2. Route wire W-16 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.

Figure 41
3. Notice the wire routes completely with no splice, from start to end, as shown.

4. Complete the routing of wire W-16.

5. Select the brown W-16 wire and insert locations to insert a splice.

 Select the brown wire in the graphics window, then right-click and select Insert Locations.
6. Specify a new location below the wires at the location shown.
Figure 42
 Insert a new location for only the brown W-16 wire and none of the other wires in the harness at
this location. You can single out the W-16 wire by clearing all the other wires from the Items tab in
the dashboard.

7. In Cabling mode, insert the SPLICE_2-1.PRT component into the cabling assembly as a splice.
Specify coordinate system IN_1 as the Entry Port (component) reference and the newly inserted
segment location as the assembly reference.

Figure 43
 Specify the Component Type as Splice and ensure SP-01 is specified as the Reference
Designator.
8. Rotate the SPLICE_2-1.PRT component 180 degrees.
9. Notice that coordinate system IN_1 is specified for both the Entry and Exit paths of the W-16 wire.
Update the Exit Path to coordinate system OUT.

10. Make sure to specify Yes as the Show option before completing the splice.
Figure 44
11. Update logical references for SP-01.

12. Route wire W-18 Via Network as shown. Skip the logical references designation.

Figure 45
13. Update the logical reference information.

14. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically. Notice that all components are matched
except for wires W-17, W-19, and W-20, splice component SP-02, and one spool 14_RED_SXL.

1. Task 14. Assemble a splice and route its wires.


1. Switch Creo Parametric to the Standard application.
2. Assemble component SPLICE_2-1.PRT.

3. Mate the bottom surface of SPLICE_2-1.PRT to the main base surface, in the location shown.

4. Press CTRL+ALT and drag and rotate the component as shown. Coordinate system OUT should face
towards the MS-1 connector.

5. Create a Fix constraint before completing the component definition.


Figure 46
6. Switch Creo Parametric to the Cabling application.
7. Open the Auto Designator dialog box and notice that SP-02 has been Auto Matched to the newly
assembled SPLICE_2-1.PRT.

8. Review the routing of wires W-17, W-19, and W-20 in the wiring diagram as shown.

Figure 47
9. Route wires W-17, W-19, and W-20 Via Network as shown.

Figure 48
 Notice that the system no longer prompts you to designate the remaining components.
1. Task 15. Review logical references.
1. Update the logical reference information.

2. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically. Notice that all components are now
matched.

3. Save the CABLING.ASM assembly.

This completes the exercise.


Concept: Modifying Wires and Cable Routing
Modifying Wires and Cable Routing
In this step of the project, you modify wires and the cable routing.

Figure 1 – Rerouting Wires


First, you update the wiring diagram in Creo Schematics Lite and import the modifications into the
cabling assembly. Next, you update the logical references to match the wiring diagram modifications.
Then, you update the wiring to match the logical references.

After you have made the edits due to the modified wiring diagram, you relocate one of the splices.
Then, you reassign a connector to one of the different components in the assembly. This causes you
to relocate the other splice and reroute the affected wiring.

Next, you edit one of the control modules by rotating it 90 degrees. This causes you to modify the
wires leading to the control module. You then further modify wire routing and edit wire lengths.

Finally, you create bundles, zip ties, tie wraps, tape features, and marker features.

Figure 2 – Creating a Bundle

Figure 3 – Creating a Zip Tie


You must also create the necessary spools for some of these items.
1. Task 1. Update the Creo Schematics diagram and export a new XML file.
1. Maximize the Creo Schematics Lite application and navigate to the SW-01 switch.

2. Edit the properties of the W-12 wire.

3. Notice the spool_name property is currently set to 16_yel_sxl. Apply a dataset and add
the 16_wht_sxl row.
4. Navigate to the L-02 lamp.

5. Double-click wire W-04 to edit it.

6. Drag the W-04 endpoint from port C2 to C1.

7. Optionally, drag the W-03 and W-05 endpoints to edit their end shapes, as shown.

Figure 1
8. Navigate to the L-01 lamp.

9. Double-click wire W-07 to edit it.

10. Drag the W-07 endpoint from port C2 to C1.

11. Optionally, drag the W-06 and W-08 endpoints to edit their end shapes, as shown.

Figure 2
12. Export the modified diagram to the Projects/XML folder as cabinet_modified.xml.

 Export the file to the Projects\XML folder.
 Select the Pro/CABLING option and clear the Pre Wildfire 3.0 check box.
 Select the Current sheet option.
13. Minimize the Creo Schematics Lite application.
1. Task 2. Update the Logical Data in Creo Parametric.
1. In Creo Parametric, import the new cabinet_modified.xml file.
2. Update the logical reference information.

3. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically.

4. Notice that the W-04 and W-07 wires are no longer matched due to a routing issue.

5. Notice that the W-12 wire is no longer matched due to a missing spool.

 Scroll to the spool section of the information window and verify the 16_WHT_SXL spool is
missing.

1. Task 3. Update the wiring to match the new logical data.


1. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

2. Toggle the display to Thick Cables.


3. Navigate to the RELAY.ASM assemblies.

4. Locate the W-12 wire and notice it is still yellow from the original routing as shown.

Figure 3
5. Edit the list of spools and notice that 16_WHT_SXL is not listed.

6. Create a new spool, From Logical, and select 16_WHT_SXL.


7. Update the logical reference information.

8. Compare the logical reference information alphabetically.

9. Notice that the W-12 wire and 16_WHT_SXL spool are now matched.

10. Regenerate the assembly and notice that the W-12 wire is now white as shown.
Figure 4
11. Zoom to the wires under the lamps and notice the routing as shown.

Figure 5
12. Open the Route cables dialog box and find cables to edit their routing.

13. Modify the cable options to Include complete cables. Use this option to select the W-04 and W-07
wires and update their routing to the connectors.
14. Notice the wires automatically moved to new locations as shown.

Figure 6
15. Update and compare logical references alphabetically.

16. Notice that all components match once again.

1. Task 4. Relocate the SP-01 splice.


1. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

2. Select the brown W-16 wire to the left of the SP-01 splice and edit the segment.

 Select the wire segment, then right-click and select Edit Segment.
3. Drag the left location point of the brown segment leading to the splice so that it is above the rest of the
harness.

4. Regenerate the assembly.


Figure 7
5. Edit the definition of SPLICE_2-1.PRT.

6. Rotate the component 180 degrees and regenerate the assembly.

Figure 8
1. Task 5. Reassign a connector.
1. Undesignate the MS-1 Reference Designator as shown.

Figure 9
2. Specify the opposite connector on the right side of the manual switch as shown.
Figure 10
3. Update all logical references.

4. Compare logical references alphabetically, and that notice W-01, W-02, and W-19 are not matched as
shown.

Figure 11
5. Notice that W-17 and W-20 are matched since they both just connect to the splice SP-02, not the MS-
1 connector.

6. Delete the entire W-19 wire.


Figure 12
7. Delete a portion of the W-20 and W-17 wires between the SP-02 connector and the segment location
shown.

Figure 13
Figure 14
 Select the wire, then right-click and select Edit > Delete > Cable Portion.
 You must press CTRL when selecting the two locations between which to remove cables.

8. Edit the definition of splice SP-02. Reposition the splice to the location shown. Ensure that coordinate
system OUT is pointing towards the MS-1 connector as shown.

Figure 15
 Delete the Fix constraint and orient to the 3D_1 view orientation before repositioning the
component. You can then re-create the Fix constraint at the new position.

9. Press CTRL and select both W-01 and W-02 wires near the old MS-1 connector.

10. Route the wires. They should now automatically snap to the newly defined MS-1 connector.

Figure 16
 The wires now actually go through some of the components to reach the new connector location.
You will fix this next.

11. Orient to the FRONT view orientation and add a network segment as shown.
Figure 17
12. Press CTRL and select both the W-01 and W-02 wires near the old MS-1 connector.

13. Reroute the wires.

 Right-click and select Reroute.


 In the Source tab, edit the Path type to Locations.
 Select the left and right network location points shown for the Start and End path to transfer
references, respectively.

Figure 18
14. In the Target tab, select the lower and upper network location points shown for the Start and End path
to follow references, respectively.
Figure 19
15. Route wires W-17, W-19, and W-20 Via Network as shown.

Figure 20
16. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the new wires as shown.

Figure 21
Figure 22
1. Task 6. Edit a top-level component.
1. Switch to the top-level ELEC_CABINET.ASM.

2. Edit the second instance of CONTROL_MODULE.PRT in the model tree.

3. Edit the angle from 0 degrees to -90 degrees and regenerate the assembly.

Figure 23
1. Task 7. Modify wires leading to the control module.
1. Switch back to the CABLING.ASM.

2. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

3. Select one of the wires connecting to CM-02.

4. Insert a new location and drag it to the approximate location shown.

Figure 24
5. Reorient the model to view the wires entering the CM-02 connector.

6. Select one of the network location points on the CM-02 connector and edit the location properties.

7. Edit the Grouping to Flat and regenerate the assembly.


Figure 25
8. Edit the Location Packing for the flat grouping into the CM-02 connector.

9. Use Cut and Paste After to adjust the yellow W-20 wire order as shown and regenerate the
assembly.

Figure 26
1. Task 8. Modify wires near the lamps.
1. Zoom to the lamp area and locate wire W-03 as shown. Notice the triangular loop with the green
lamp.

Figure 27
2. Select wire W-03 and insert a new location as shown. The approach of this wire into both L-02 and L-
03 is similar now.
Figure 28
 Select the existing network location below the L-03 lamp.

1. Task 9. Modify the wire routing into the relay clips.


1. Open one of the green spade CLIP.PRT parts from the RELAY.ASM assembly.

2. If necessary, enable the display of datum axes and datum points.

3. Unhide the AXES_ROUTING layer if necessary.

Figure 29
4. Close the window to return to CABLING.ASM.

5. Locate and zoom to the purple W-11 wire.


Figure 30
6. Select the W-11 wire and insert two new location points. Select datum axis ROUTE_AXIS, followed
by datum point ROUTE_PNT.

Figure 31
7. Locate and zoom to the black W-09 wire.

Figure 32
8. Select the W-09 wire and begin to insert two new location points. Select the Items tab, and notice that
wires W-09 and W-05 are both selected.
 Select datum axis ROUTE_AXIS and edit the Angle to 180 in the Options tab.
 Select datum point ROUTE_PNT and edit the Angle to 90 in the Options tab.
Figure 33
9. Select the network location point as shown.

Figure 34
10. Edit the height dimension from 1.7 to 8 and regenerate the assembly.

Figure 35
11. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

12. Edit the definition of the specified network location point and drag it downward to the approximate
location shown.
Figure 36
 When you drag the location point downward, the network, purple wire, and orange wire will appear
to duplicate until you complete the feature.

13. Insert the ROUTE_AXIS and ROUTE_PNT locations for the red W-10, blue W-08, and white W-12
wires on the other side of the relay.

Figure 37
 The W-08 and W-12 wires are modified at the same time. Specify the ROUTE_AXIS location first
and complete the location. Then insert a new location and specify the ROUTE_PNT. Edit the
Angle to270.
14. Open the green CLIP.PRT and hide the AXES_ROUTING layer.

15. Close the window to return to CABLING.ASM.

1. Task 10. Edit the wire lengths near the power box.
1. Orient to the FRONT view orientation.

2. Create a fixed length for the black wire segment in the cable. Edit the length to approximately 10%
greater than its current value.
Figure 38
 You must press CTRL when selecting the two locations.

3. Repeat the previous step for the three remaining wires' segments in the cable.

Figure 39
1. Task 11. Create sheath spools.
1. Create a sheath spool named sheath_1.
 Click Spools , then click Create > Sheath from the menu manager.
2. Add the COLOR column to the Electrical Parameters dialog box.

3. Edit the parameters for SHEATH_1 as follows:

 Ensure the SHEATH_TYPE is set to SHRINK.

Edit the WALL_THICKNESS to 0.18.


Edit the MIN_BEND_RADIUS to 2.
Edit the PRESHRINK_INNER_DIAMETER to 20.
Edit the COLOR to blk.
 Ensure you type the color as blk, rather than selecting BLACK from the drop-down list.
4. Create a sheath spool named tape_1.
5. Remove the PRESHRINK_INNER_DIAMETER column from the Electrical Parameters dialog box,
and add the WIDTH column.

6. Edit the parameters for TAPE_1 as follows:

 Ensure the SHEATH_TYPE is set to TAPE.

 Edit the WALL_THICKNESS to 0.18.


 Edit the MIN_BEND_RADIUS to 2.
 Edit the COLOR to blk.
 Edit the WIDTH to 10.
 Ensure you type the color as blk, rather than selecting BLACK from the drop-down list.
1. Task 12. Create the first bundle and branch bundle.
1. Zoom to splice SP-01.

2. Insert a location point in the main branch to the left of SP-01 using the Use Previous Location option
as shown.
Figure 40
3. Add the new network location point to the W-16 and W-18 wires, respectively, that route into SP-01 as
shown.

Figure 41
4. Rotate the new location point 180 degrees as shown to untwist the wires.
Figure 42
 Edit the definition of the network location point and edit the Angle 180 degrees.
5. Create a bundle named B1_Main.
 Specify a Round grouping and use the SHEATH_1 spool.
 Specify the Along Path bundle option and select the two network path locations as shown.
 Include all cables along the path in the bundle.

 Select all cables and accept the default parameters.

Figure 43
Figure 44
6. Create a bundle named B1_Branch.
 Specify a Round grouping and use the SHEATH_1 spool.
 Specify the Branch bundle option, press CTRL, and select the two horizontal network path
locations shown.
 Select the network path location at the top to define the other end of the branch.

 Accept the default parameters.

Figure 45

Figure 46
7. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the new bundle as shown.
Figure 47
1. Task 13. Create the second bundle and branch bundle.
1. Insert a location point in the main branch to the right of SP-01 using the Use Previous
Location option as shown.

Figure 48
2. Add the new network location point to wire W-16, as shown.

Figure 49
3. Create a bundle named B2_Main.
 Specify a Round grouping and use the SHEATH_1 spool.
 Specify the Along Path bundle option and select the two network path location points as shown.
 Include all cables along the path in the bundle.

 Select all cables and accept the default parameters.

Figure 50

Figure 51
4. Create a bundle named B2_Branch.
 Specify a Round grouping and use the SHEATH_1 spool.
 Specify the Branch bundle option, press CTRL, and select the two upper network path location
points shown.
 Select the lower network path location point shown to define the other end of the branch.

 Accept the default parameters.


Figure 52

Figure 53
5. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the new bundle as shown.
Figure 54
1. Task 14. Create zip ties as components.
1. Enable the display of coordinate systems, if necessary.

2. Insert the ZIP.PRT component into the cabling assembly. Use the ZIP_5 instance. Specify coordinate
system ATTACH as the Entry Port (component) reference and the network segment location point
shown as the assembly reference.

Figure 55
 Specify the Component Type as Custom.
3. Rotate the ZIP.PRT component 180 degrees and accept the other defaults.
4. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the zip tie as shown.
Figure 56
5. Insert the ZIP.PRT component into the cabling assembly. Use the ZIP_7-5 instance. Specify
coordinate system ATTACH as the Entry Port (component) reference and the network segment
location point shown as the assembly reference.

Figure 57
 Specify the Component Type as Custom.
6. Rotate the ZIP.PRT component 180 degrees and accept the other defaults.
7. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the zip tie as shown.

Figure 58
1. Task 15. Create tie wraps as cosmetics.
1. Create a tie wrap named tie_1. Place the tie wrap in the location shown.
Figure 59
2. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the tie wrap as shown. Enable datum point display to
view the tag.

Figure 60
1. Task 16. Create tape features.
1. Create a tape feature named elec_tape, using the TAPE_1 spool.
 The tape should be comprised of 3 winds.
 Specify the location to the left of the amber L-02 connector, as shown.

Figure 61
2. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the tape as shown. Enable datum point display to view
the tag.
Figure 62
1. Task 17. Create marker features.
1. Create a marker named blk. Select the point shown on the black wire as the center of the marker.
 Type 20 as the marker length.
 Type 10 as the marker expanded diameter.
 Type 1.3 as the marker reduced diameter.

Figure 63
2. Toggle to Thick Cables display and inspect the marker as shown. Enable datum point display to view
the tag.
Figure 64
This completes the exercise.
Concept: Flattening the Harness
Flattening the Harness
In this step of the project, you flatten the harness. First, you create the harness manufacturing
assembly.

Figure 1 – Creating the Harness


Then, you begin manually flattening the harness segments. Next, you automatically fan the remainder
of the harness.

Once the harness has been fanned, you assemble the connector components into the harness,
editing the orientations of flat locations as necessary. Next, you fan out the connectors.

Figure 3 – Fanning out the Connectors


After you have fanned all the connectors, you check the flattened status of the harness and flatten a
closed loop in the harness. Finally, you view the flattened harness.
Figure 2 – Viewing the Flattened Harness
1. Task 1. Create the harness manufacturing assembly.
1. To view light cables more easily, edit to the dark background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Dark Background as the color Scheme and
click OK.
2. Create a new manufacturing harness named HARNESS_MFG. The Type should be Manufacturing,
and the Sub-type should be Harness.
3. Reference the Master Rep of HARNESS_1.PRT.

4. Name the Flat Harness model HARNESS_FLAT.

Figure 1
1. Task 2. Manually fan harness segments.
1. Zoom to the harness trunk near the horizontal splice as shown.

Figure 2
2. Begin flattening and laying out the harness. Select the left tip of the brown W-16 wire for the start
point as shown.
Figure 3
 Click Flatten > Lay Out from the menu manager.
3. Using the Manual Fan layout, select the tip on the right of the brown W-16 wire, as shown.
 Specify a bend radius of 4.
 Specify a bend angle of 80.

Figure 4
4. Using the Manual Fan layout, select the right tip of the orange W-18 wire, as shown.
 Specify a bend radius of 4.
 Specify a bend angle of -80.

Figure 5
5. Using the Manual Fan layout, select the right tip of the yellow W-20 wire, as shown.
 Specify a bend radius of 4.
 Specify a bend angle of 0.
Figure 6
6. Notice the wires starting to flatten in the HARNESS_MFG.ASM.

Figure 7
7. Select a new start point to lay cables out from. Specify the right tip of the brown W-16 wire, as shown.

Figure 8
8. Using the Manual Fan layout, select the left tip of the brown W-16 wire, as shown.
 Specify a bend radius of 4.
 Specify a bend angle of -30.
Figure 9
1. Task 3. Automatically fan the remainder of the harness.
1. Select a new start point to lay cables out from. Specify the left tip of the splice trunk, as shown.

Figure 10
 To automatically flatten the harness, it is typically recommended to select a location near the main
“trunk.”

2. Using the Auto Fan layout, accept the default bend radius.
 When prompted to select the path to flatten, select a segment on the upper-right side of the
triangle loop, as shown.

Figure 11
3. The harness should fully unflatten in the HARNESS_MFG.ASM assembly.

Figure 12
1. Task 4. Drag and modify flattened segments.
1. In the HARNESS_MFG.ASM assembly, create and save view orientation FRONT using default
datums as shown.

Figure 13
2. Zoom to the location shown.

Figure 14
3. Use the Move Segment option to drag the relay branch down as shown.
Figure 15
4. Modify the angles for the two main segments to 45 degrees, and perform an automatic regeneration.

Figure 16
5. Move the segment ends of the two main segments as shown. The larger end segments should be
horizontal, and the shorter end segments should be straight.
Figure 17
6. Move the end segments to configure the branch from top to bottom, as shown in the following order:
gray, blue, green, brown, orange, purple, and tan.

Figure 18
1. Task 5. Assemble the connector components to the harness.
1. Begin assembling components to the harness.

 Click Flatten > Components > Assemble from the menu manager.
2. Select the network location point at the end of the tan W-07 wire, as shown.

Figure 19
3. If necessary, move the other wires closer to the connector component as shown.
Figure 20
4. Assemble all the remaining components.

Figure 21
5. Disassemble the Power Box, including all children of the Power Box.

6. Also disassemble the two relays.

Figure 22
1. Task 6. Edit the orientation of flat locations.
1. Zoom to the location shown.
Figure 23
2. Perform a Flat Orient operation on all flat locations in the flattened harness in a Vertical plane.
3. Perform an automatic regeneration and notice the new orientation as shown.

Figure 24
1. Task 7. Fan out connectors.
1. Fan Out the cables for the CONN_9_CM.PRT component connector as shown.
Figure 25
 Notice the message indicating that some wires were not fanned out due to insufficient length.

2. Switch to the CABLING.ASM. assembly.

3. Add an additional 10% length to the gray/red, blue/green, and green/black wire pair segments on the
right as shown. You must edit the length of both the upper and lower wires in the pair.

Figure 26
4. Return to the HARNESS_MFG.ASM and regenerate the assembly. Notice that all wires now reach
the connector.
Figure 27
5. Fan Out the wires for the CONN_9_CM.PRT component connector again.

6. Notice that all the wires now fan out as shown.

Figure 28
 If necessary, you can return to CABLING.ASM to shorten or further lengthen wires.

7. Zoom to the upper splice as shown.


Figure 29
8. Move the orange W-18 wire segment and the splice connector above the main trunk as shown.

Figure 30
9. Redefine the splice connector component and edit the Orient Angle to -45.
10. Fan Out the splice connector component as shown.
Figure 31
 If necessary, you can return to CABLING.ASM to lengthen wires as needed.

11. Zoom to the lower splice as shown.

Figure 32
12. Edit the red W-19 wire bend radius to 4 as shown and regenerate the assembly.
Figure 33
13. Move the red W-19 wire segment and splice into a vertical position as shown.

Figure 34
14. Move the yellow W-20 and tan W-17 wires approximately as shown.
Figure 35
15. Fan out the splice connector component as shown.

Figure 36
 If the splice does not fan successfully, try one or all of the following steps:

 In the CABLING.ASM, move the splice connector slightly down and towards the right.

 Lengthen the yellow W-20 and tan W-17 wire segments in the CABLING.ASM assembly.

 Edit the splice connector Orient Angle.

16. Zoom to the connector below the splice as shown.

17. Edit the red W-19 wire bend radius to 4 and regenerate the assembly.
Figure 37
18. Move the green/black W-01 wire into its approximate position.

19. Fan Out the connector as shown.

Figure 38
20. Zoom to the four connectors on the right side of the harness as shown.

Figure 39
21. Fan out each connector, one at a time, editing wire radii or angles as necessary.
Figure 40

Figure 41
1. Task 8. Check the harness flattened status.
1. Check the Flat Status of the harness.

 In the ribbon, click Harness from the Info group in the Model tab.
2. Zoom to the triangular loop network section and notice the unflattened segments. These segments
are not grayed out like the rest of the network.
Figure 42
 The black shielded wire is not flattened, either. This is intentional.

1. Task 9. Flatten a closed loop in the harness.


1. Set a new start point in the harness, and select the location at the upper-right of the triangular loop as
shown.

Figure 43
2. Select Close Loop and press CTRL to select the bottom-left and top-right locations as shown.
Figure 44
 If some cables are not long enough to close the loop, you must switch to CABLING.ASM and
lengthen either the black W-09 wire segment, orange W-05 wire segment, or both before
attempting to close the loop again.

3. Notice the added flat segment in the manufacturing window.

Figure 45
1. Task 10. View the flattened harness.
1. Enable only the following Cabling Display types: .
Figure 46
2. In the sub window, create a view orientation named 3D as shown.

Figure 47
 Select Reorient from the Named Views drop-down menu in the In Graphics toolbar.
3. Save the HARNESS_MFG.ASM assembly and close the window to return to the CABLING.ASM.
assembly.

4. To view the 3D model more easily, edit to the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the exercise.
Concept: Creating a Harness Drawing
Creating a Harness Drawing
In this step of the project, you create a harness drawing. First, you create the harness drawing. Next,
you add a view of the cabling assembly, then show and configure reference designator notes on the
view.

Figure 1 – Viewing the Cabling Assembly View


You then add views of the electrical cabinet assembly.

Figure 3 – Viewing the Electrical Cabinet View


Next, you add the flat harness assembly and add a view on a new sheet.
Figure 2 – Viewing the Flat Harness View
You then configure this sheet and the view by inserting a BOM table, adding BOM balloons, and
inserting pinout tables for each of the connectors. You also show some of the harness dimensions.

Finally, you add the harness model and add a view on the new sheet. You then configure this sheet
by inserting a spool BOM table and a harness table.
1. Task 1. Prepare the assemblies for drawing creation.
1. Switch to the ELEC_CABINET.ASM.

2. Ensure that the CABLING simplified representation is active.

3. Switch back to the CABLING.ASM.

4. Hide the unused CONN_2_MS.PRT connector.

Figure 1
1. Task 2. Create the harness drawing.
1. To view light cables more easily, edit to the dark background color:

 Click File> Options.


 Select System Colour and then select Dark Background as the Color Scheme and click OK.
2. Create a drawing named CABINET_HARNESS.DRW.

 Specify the Empty with format option.


 Specify the C_FORMAT_GENERIC.FRM format in the working directory.

 Type your name when prompted.

Figure 2
1. Task 3. Add a view of the cabling assembly.
1. Disable the Lock View Movement option, if necessary.
2. Insert a general view, No Combined State, in the lower-left corner of the drawing. Specify the
following view options:
 Specify 3D_2 as the view orientation.

 Edit the Display style as No Hidden.


 Specify Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Specify Thick for Cable display.
 Specify that the colors come from The model.
 Enter a Custom scale value of 0.40.
3. Reposition the view as necessary.

Figure 3
1. Task 4. Show and configure reference designator notes.
1. Add all reference designators to the drawing view. In the drawing, reference designators are
considered notes.

2. Show all of the notes and arrange them approximately as shown.

Figure 4
 In the drawing ribbon, select the Annotate tab.
3. Use the Edit Attachment option to attach the PB-01, RL-01, and RL-02 to the surfaces of the
components, as shown. Move the notes as necessary.
Figure 5
1. Task 5. Add views of the electrical cabinet assembly.
1. Add the ELEC_CABINET.ASM model to the drawing. Ensure that you specify the CABLING simplified
representation.

2. Insert a general view, No Combined State, in the upper-left corner of the drawing. Specify the
following view options:
 Specify FRONT as the view orientation.

 Edit the Display style as No Hidden.


 Specify Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Specify Thick for Cable display.
 Specify that the colors come from The model.
 Enter a Custom scale value of 0.35.
 You must select the Layout tab to insert a new view.

3. Reposition the view as necessary.

Figure 6
4. Insert another general view, No Combined State, in the upper-right corner of the drawing. Specify
the following view options:
 Specify 3D_CABINET-2 as the view orientation.

 Edit the Display style as Shading.


 Specify Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Enter a Custom scale value of 0.25.
5. Reposition the view as necessary.

Figure 7
1. Task 6. Add a model and create sheet 2.
1. Add the HARNESS_FLAT.ASM model to the drawing.

2. Add a new drawing sheet.

3. Type your name when prompted.

1. Task 7. Add a view of the flattened harness.


1. Insert a general view, No Combined State, in the center of the new sheet. Specify the following view
options:
 Specify FRONT as the view orientation.

 Edit the Display style as No Hidden.


 Specify Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Specify Thick for Cable display.
 Specify that the colors come from The model.
 Enter a Custom scale value of 0.40.
2. Reposition the view as necessary.
Figure 8
1. Task 8. Insert a BOM table.
1. Insert the HARN_BOM.TBL table from file.

2. Place the table in the upper-right corner as shown.

Figure 9
1. Task 9. Add BOM balloons.
1. Edit the repeat region attributes for the table.

2. Edit the attributes from Recursive to Flat.


Figure 10
3. Add BOM balloons to the harness view using the table on the sheet.

Figure 11
 Show all the BOM balloons. Click Create Balloons .
4. Show all the BOM balloon a second time to create the additional balloons for each assembly
component.

5. Reposition the balloons as necessary.

Figure 12
1. Task 10. Add a pinout table for the CM-02 connector.
1. Insert the CONN_PIN-OUT.TBL table from file.
2. Place the table to the left of the upper CM-02 connector as shown.

Figure 13
 Notice the table does not correspond to the connector.

3. Edit the model and simplified representation used to drive the repeat region.

4. After specifying the first row in the table, select the CONN_9_CM.PRT connector next to the table.

Figure 14
5. Edit the model and simplified representation used to drive the repeat region.

6. After specifying the third row in the table, select the CONN_9_CM.PRT connector next to the table.
Figure 15
1. Task 11. Create the remaining connector pinout tables.
1. Repeat the previous procedure, creating pinout tables for the following connectors:

 CM-01

 CONN_5_EB

 CONN_2_L

 MS-1

 L-01

 L-02

 L-03

Figure 16
 Reposition balloons as necessary.

1. Task 12. Show harness dimensions.


1. Begin adding annotations to the drawing.

2. Show the dimensions for the red wire on the far-left side of the harness. Be sure to show all three
dimensions.
3. Reposition the dimensions as shown.

Figure 17
4. Edit the dimension properties of the bend radius value. Edit the Nominal Value to 4.0 and regenerate
the model.

Figure 18
5. Try to edit the length of the red wire.

6. Notice that you cannot modify the dimension because it is driven by the model.

1. Task 13. Add a model and create sheet 3.


1. Add the HARNESS_1.PRT model to the drawing.

2. Add a new drawing sheet and type your name when prompted.
1. Task 14. Add a general view of the 3-D extracted harness.
1. On the new sheet, insert a general view in the lower-left corner of the drawing. Specify the following
view options:

 Specify 3D as the view orientation.

 Edit the Display style as No Hidden.


 Specify Hide for Skeleton model display.
 Specify Thick for Cable display.
 Specify that the colors come from The model.
 Enter a Custom scale value of 0.40.
2. Reposition the view as shown.

Figure 19
1. Task 15. Insert a spool BOM table.
1. Insert the SPOOL_BOM.TBL table from file.

2. Place the table in the upper-right corner of the sheet as shown.


Figure 20
1. Task 16. Place a harness from-to table.
1. Insert the HARN_FROM-TO.TBL table from file.

2. Place the table in the upper-left corner of the sheet.

3. Filter the repeat region for the table By Rule. Add the following filters:
 &harn.run.name!=NETWORK
 &harn.run.name!=B*
 These filters remove the network and any bundles from the table.

4. Sort the repeat region Forward from the left-most column.


 Select a wire from the first column in the table.

Figure 21
5. Save the drawing and close the window.

6. Save the assemblies and close their windows.

7. To view the 3D model more easily, edit to the default background color:

 Click File > Options.


 Select the System Colors and then select Default as the color Scheme and click OK.
This completes the exercise.

You might also like